IBM Printer RS 6000 44P User Manual
RS/6000 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
IBM  
User’s Guide  
Note to Printer:  
Print Graphic between registration marks  
Book trim size is 7 3/8 x 9 inches  
Front Cover is 10pt. Carolina stock or equivalent C1S (coated one side)  
Use Color Graphic cvtestd.ps on front cover - User Book  
SA38-0559-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS/6000 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
IBM  
User’s Guide  
SA38-0559-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Second Edition (October 2000)  
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information in “Safety Notices” on page xi,  
“Appendix A. Environmental Notices” on page 161, and “Appendix B. Notices” on page 163.  
©International Business Machines Corporation 2000. All rights reserved.  
Note to U.S. Government Users - Documentation related to restricted rights - Use, duplication, or disclosure is subject  
to the restrictions set forth in the GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp..  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Safety Notices .  
Electrical Safety.  
Unit Emissions .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. xi  
. xi  
. xii  
. xii  
Laser Safety Information.  
Data Integrity and Verification .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. xiii  
About This Book .  
ISO 9000.  
Online Publications  
Related Publications .  
Trademarks . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. xv  
. xv  
. xv  
. xv  
. xv  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 1. Introducing the 44P Model 170  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1  
. 1  
. 1  
. 1  
. 1  
. 1  
. 2  
. 2  
. 2  
. 2  
. 2  
. 2  
. 2  
. 3  
. 4  
. 6  
System Features  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Bus Architecture .  
Microprocessor .  
Memory  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Media Drives .  
Other Drives .  
Power Supply  
Keyboard .  
Mouse .  
.
.
.
Operator Panel .  
Input/Output Ports .  
Security Features  
.
.
.
.
Front View.  
Rear View .  
.
.
.
.
Operator Panel .  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 7  
. 7  
. 7  
. 8  
. 8  
Starting the System Unit .  
Stopping the System Unit.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Reading the Operator Panel Display .  
Operator Panel .  
Using the Keyboards .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 9  
Using the Three-Button Mouse  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 10  
. 10  
. 10  
. 11  
. 12  
. 13  
. 14  
. 14  
. 15  
. 15  
. 16  
Handling the Mouse Correctly .  
Caring for the Mouse.  
Cleaning the Mouse .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the 3.5-Inch Diskette Drive.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Write-Protecting 3.5-Inch Diskettes .  
Loading and Unloading the 3.5-Inch Diskette .  
Using the CD-ROM Drive  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Front View of CD-ROM Drive .  
Understanding the Status Lights .  
Handling Compact Discs  
.
.
.
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Handling Considerations  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 16  
. 17  
. 18  
. 18  
. 18  
. 19  
. 20  
. 20  
. 21  
. 21  
. 22  
. 22  
. 22  
. 23  
. 23  
. 24  
. 24  
. 25  
. 26  
. 27  
. 29  
. 29  
. 30  
. 30  
. 30  
. 31  
. 31  
. 31  
. 32  
. 32  
. 32  
. 33  
. 33  
. 34  
. 35  
. 36  
. 37  
. 38  
. 38  
. 38  
. 39  
Loading a Compact Disc  
Opening the Tray Manually .  
Playing an Audio CD .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
General Information for the 8mm Tape Drive .  
Front View of the 8mm Tape Drive  
Operating Recommendations .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8 mm Tape Cartridge Types  
Tape Cartridge Compatibility  
.
.
Setting the Write-Protect Tab on 8 mm Tape Cartridges  
Environmental Considerations for 8 mm Data Cartridges .  
Operating the 8mm Tape Drive in Harsh Environments  
Erasing 8 mm Data Cartridge .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Using the 8mm Tape Drive .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Status Lights  
.
.
.
.
.
Liquid Crystal Display  
Changing the Display Language .  
Loading the 8 mm Tape Cartridge  
Unloading the 8 mm Tape Cartridge .  
Cleaning the Tape Drive.  
Obtaining Additional Tape Cartridges  
.
.
.
.
General information for the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive .  
Front View of the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive .  
Using the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive.  
Operating Recommendations .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridge Types .  
Tape Cartridge Compatibility  
.
.
.
.
.
.
4 mm Tape Write Density Setting .  
Setting the Write-Protect Tab on 12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridges .  
Erasing 12/24 GB 4 mm Data Cartridge  
Environmental Considerations for 12/24 GB 4 mm Data Cartridges  
Operating the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive in Harsh Environments  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Status Lights  
Status Light States  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Loading the 12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridge .  
Unloading the 12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridge  
Cleaning the Tape Path on the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive  
Obtaining Additional Tape Cartridges  
Using the Service Processor and Service Director Features .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Processor.  
Service Director  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 41  
. 42  
. 42  
. 42  
. 42  
. 43  
. 44  
. 44  
Service Processor Menus .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Processor Menu Inactivity  
Accessing Service Processor Menus Locally .  
Accessing Service Processor Menus Remotely .  
General User Menu .  
Privileged User Menus .  
Main Menu . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iv 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor Setup Menu  
Passwords .  
Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu  
System Power Control Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 45  
. 45  
. 47  
. 48  
. 50  
. 53  
. 54  
. 54  
. 55  
. 55  
. 56  
. 57  
. 58  
. 59  
. 60  
. 61  
. 62  
. 63  
. 63  
. 63  
. 63  
. 63  
. 63  
. 64  
. 64  
. 65  
. 65  
. 65  
. 66  
. 67  
. 67  
. 68  
. 69  
. 69  
. 69  
. 70  
. 70  
. 71  
. 71  
.
.
.
.
.
.
System Information Menu .  
Language Selection Menu .  
Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
Modem Configuration Menu  
Serial Port Selection Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
Telephone Number Setup Menu .  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
.
.
.
Customer Account Setup Menu  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu .  
Service Processor Functions .  
System Power-On Methods  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Processor Call-In Security  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery .  
Boot (IPL) Speed .  
Failure During Boot Process  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Failure During Normal System Operation .  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls .  
Processor Boot-Time Deconfiguration (CPU Repeat-Gard)  
Processor Run-Time Deconfiguration (CPU-Gard) .  
Memory Boot-Time Deconfiguration (Memory Repeat-Gard) .  
.
.
Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
System Firmware Surveillance.  
Operating System Surveillance  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Call Out .  
Console Mirroring .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Processor Firmware Updates  
Service Processor Error Log  
System POST Errors .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Processor Operational Phases .  
Pre-Standby Phase  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Standby Phase.  
Bring-Up Phase  
Run-time Phase  
.
.
.
Service Processor Procedures in Service Mode .  
Chapter 4. System Management Services .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 73  
. 73  
. 75  
. 76  
. 79  
. 80  
. 81  
. 83  
. 85  
. 86  
Graphical System Management Services .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Config.  
Multiboot .  
Utilities  
Password  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Power-On Password .  
Privileged-Access Password  
ErrorLog .  
RIPL .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Address .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 87  
. 88  
. 90  
. 91  
. 92  
. 93  
. 94  
. 94  
. 95  
. 96  
. 97  
. 98  
. 98  
Ping  
Config.  
SCSI ID .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Firmware Update .  
Firmware Recovery  
Text-Based System Management Services  
Display Configuration.  
Multiboot Menu.  
Select Boot Device  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configure Nth Boot Device .  
Utilities  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Password and Unattended Start Mode  
SCSI Spin Up.  
Display Error Log  
Remote Initial Program Load Setup  
Change SCSI ID .  
Update System or Service Processor Firmware  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 100  
. 100  
. 100  
. 103  
. 103  
. 104  
. 104  
. 104  
. 105  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Firmware Recovery .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Select Console  
Select Language .  
Open Firmware .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics .  
Standalone and Online Diagnostics Operating Considerations .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 107  
. 107  
. 107  
. 107  
. 108  
. 108  
. 108  
. 108  
. 109  
. 109  
. 109  
. 110  
. 111  
. 111  
. 111  
. 112  
. 112  
Selecting a Console Display .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Identifying the Terminal Type to the Diagnostics Programs .  
Undefined Terminal Types.  
Resetting the Terminal .  
Running Standalone Diagnostics  
Running Online Diagnostics .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Running Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal  
Online Diagnostics Modes  
Service Mode .  
Concurrent Mode.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Concurrent Mode .  
Maintenance Mode .  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Maintenance Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Standalone Diagnostic Operation  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Running the Standalone Diagnostics  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 113  
. 113  
. 114  
. 115  
. 115  
. 115  
. 115  
. 116  
. 116  
Tasks  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Add Resource to Resource List .  
AIX Shell Prompt.  
Analyze Adapter Internal Log.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Backup and Restore Media  
Certify Media .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Change Hardware Vital Product Data .  
Configure Dials and LPFKeys  
.
.
.
vi 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configure ISA Adapter .  
Configure Reboot Policy  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On Policy.  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 117  
. 117  
. 118  
. 120  
. 120  
. 120  
. 121  
. 121  
. 121  
. 121  
. 122  
. 123  
. 123  
. 123  
. 124  
. 124  
. 125  
. 125  
. 125  
. 125  
. 125  
. 125  
. 126  
. 126  
. 126  
. 127  
. 127  
. 128  
. 128  
. 128  
. 129  
. 130  
. 130  
. 130  
130  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configure Service Processor .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Surveillance Setup .  
Modem Configuration .  
Call In/Out Setup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Site-Specific Call In/Out Setup .  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup .  
Configure Surveillance Policy  
Create Customized Configuration Diskette  
Delete Resource from Resource List .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Disk Maintenance  
Disk to Disk Copy  
Display/Alter Sector .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display Configuration and Resource List .  
Display Firmware Device Node Information .  
Display Hardware Error Report .  
Display Hardware Vital Product Data .  
Display Machine Check Error Log .  
Display Microcode Level .  
Display or Change Bootlist  
Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options .  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display Resource Attributes .  
Display Service Hints  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display Software Product Data .  
Display System Environmental Sensors .  
Examples .  
Display Test Patterns  
Download Microcode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Download Microcode to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter .  
Download Microcode to Disk Drive Attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
Download Microcode to a PCI FC-AL Adapter .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 130  
. 131  
. 131  
. 132  
. 132  
. 132  
. 133  
. 134  
. 134  
. 134  
. 135  
. 135  
. 135  
. 136  
. 136  
Download Microcode to Other Devices  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Fiber Channel RAID Service Aids .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware  
Format Media .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hardfile Attached to SCSI Adapter (non-RAID) .  
Hardfile Attached to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Optical Media .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Diskette Format .  
Generic Microcode Download  
Local Area Network Analyzer.  
Log Repair Action  
Periodic Diagnostics  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify.  
Process Supplemental Media  
.
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Run Diagnostics .  
Run Error Log Analysis  
Run Exercisers  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 136  
. 136  
. 136  
. 136  
. 137  
. 137  
. 138  
. 138  
. 138  
. 139  
. 139  
. 141  
. 141  
. 141  
. 141  
. 142  
. 1432  
. 143  
.
.
Exerciser Commands (Cmd) .  
Acronyms .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Memory Exerciser  
Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies .  
Save or Restore Service Processor Configuration .  
SCSI BUS Analyzer .  
SCSI Device Identification and Removal .  
SCSI Tape Drive Service Aid .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Spare Sector Availability  
SSA Service Aid .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Update Disk-Based Diagnostics .  
Update System or Service Processor Flash .  
Update System Flash .  
7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aid  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7318 Serial Communications Network Server Service Aid  
Chapter 7. Using the System Verification Procedure .  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 145  
. 145  
. 145  
. 146  
. 146  
. 147  
Step 2. Loading the Diagnostics.  
Step 3. Running System Verification  
Step 4. Additional System Verification .  
Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination  
Problem Determination Using the Stand-alone or Online Diagnostics  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 149  
. 149  
. 149  
. 149  
. 150  
. 150  
. 150  
. 151  
. 151  
. 151  
. 152  
. 152  
. 152  
. 153  
. 153  
. 154  
. 154  
. 154  
. 155  
. 156  
. 156  
. 156  
. 156  
. 157  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Step 2 .  
Step 3 .  
Step 4 .  
Step 5 .  
Step 6 .  
Step 7 .  
Step 8 .  
Step 9 .  
Step 10 .  
Step 11 .  
Step 12 .  
Step 13 .  
Step 14 .  
Step 15 .  
Step 16 .  
Step 17 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics .  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure .  
.
.
.
.
Step 2 .  
Step 3 .  
Step 4 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
viii 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5 .  
Step 6 .  
Step 7 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 157  
. 159  
. 159  
Appendix A. Environmental Notices.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 161  
. 161  
. 161  
Product Recycling and Disposal.  
.
.
.
.
Environmental Design .  
.
.
.
Appendix B. Notices .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 163  
. 165  
Appendix C. Checking the Current Firmware Levels .  
Appendix D. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY Terminal  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 167  
. 168  
. 169  
. 170  
Additional Communication Attributes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Additional Keyboard Attributes  
Additional Printer Attributes  
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix E. Modem Configurations.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 171  
. 171  
. 171  
. 173  
. 173  
. 174  
. 174  
. 175  
. 175  
. 175  
. 175  
. 176  
. 177  
. 177  
Sample Modem Configuration Files  
Configuration File Selection .  
.
.
.
.
Examples for Using the Generic Sample Modem Configuration Files  
Customizing the Modem Configuration Files.  
IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Xon/Xoff Modems  
Ring Detection  
Terminal Emulators .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Recovery Procedures .  
Transfer of a Modem Session  
Recovery Strategy .  
Prevention Strategy .  
Modem Configuration Samples .  
.
.
.
.
Index  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 191  
. 195  
Reader’s Comments — We’d Like to Hear From You .  
Contents ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
x
44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Notices  
Danger notices appear on the following pages:  
xi  
xii  
v
v
A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing  
moderate or minor personal injury.  
Caution notices appear on the following pages:  
v
v
xii  
xii  
Note: For a translation of these notices, see System Unit Safety Information, order  
number SA23-2652  
Electrical Safety  
Observe the following safety instructions any time you are connecting or disconnecting  
devices attached to the workstation.  
DANGER  
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage  
on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the  
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and  
grounded to prevent an electrical shock.  
Before installing or removing signal cables, ensure that the power cables for  
the system unit and all attached devices are unplugged.  
When adding or removing any additional devices to or from the system,  
ensure that the power cables for those devices are unplugged before the  
signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the  
existing system before you add a device.  
Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables to  
prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different electrical  
potentials.  
During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations, printers,  
telephones, or station protectors for communication lines.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION:  
This product is equipped with a three–wire power cable and plug for the user’s  
safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid  
electrical shock.  
DANGER  
To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable  
Unit Emissions  
The unit-related emission value is equal to or lower than 70dB(A).  
Der Geräuschpegel der Einheit ist kleiner oder gleich 70 db(A).  
Laser Safety Information  
The optical drive in this system unit is a laser product. The optical drive has a label that  
identifies its classification. The label, located on the drive, is shown below.  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE  
APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1  
IEC 825:1984 CENELEC EN 60 825:1991  
The optical drive in this system unit is certified in the U.S. to conform to the  
requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal  
Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products. Elsewhere, the  
drive is certified to conform to the requirements of the International Electrotechnical  
Commission (IEC) 825 (1st edition 1984) and CENELEC EN 60 825:1991 for Class 1  
laser products.  
CAUTION:  
A class 3 laser is contained in the device. Do not attempt to operate the drive  
while it is disassembled. Do not attempt to open the covers of the drive as it is  
not serviceable and is to be replaced as a unit.  
Class 1 laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The optical drive contains  
internally a Class 3B gallium-arsenide laser that is nominally 30 milliwatts at 830  
nanometers. The design incorporates a combination of enclosures, electronics, and  
redundant interlocks such that there is no exposure to laser radiation above a Class 1  
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or servicing conditions.  
xii 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Data Integrity and Verification  
IBM computer systems contain mechanisms designed to reduce the possibility of  
undetected data corruption or loss. This risk, however, cannot be eliminated. Users who  
experience unplanned outages, system failures, power fluctuations or outages, or  
component failures must verify the accuracy of operations performed and data saved or  
transmitted by the system at or near the time of the outage or failure. In addition, users  
must establish procedures to ensure that there is independent data verification before  
relying on such data in sensitive or critical operations. Users should periodically check  
the IBM support websites for updated information and fixes applicable to the system and  
related software.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xiv 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Book  
This book provides information on how to use the system, use diagnostics, use service  
aids, and verify system operation. This book also provides information to help you solve  
some of the simpler problems that might occur.  
ISO 9000  
ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and manufacturing  
of this product.  
Online Publications  
RS/6000 publications are available online. To access the online books, visit our Web  
site at: http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/resource/hardware_docs/  
Related Publications  
The following publications provide additional information about your system unit:  
v
v
v
v
The RS/6000 44P Series Model 170 Installation Guide, order number  
SA38-0561,contains reference information, maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs),  
error codes, removal and replacement procedured, and a parts catalog.  
The RS/6000 44P Series Model 170 Service Guide, order number  
SA38-0560,contains reference information, maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs),  
error codes, removal and replacement procedured, and a parts catalog.  
The Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems, order number SA38-0509 ,  
contains diagnostic information, service request numbers (SRNs), and failing function  
codes (FFCs).  
The Adapter, Device, and Cable Information for Multiple Bus Systems, order number  
SA38-0516, contains information about adapters, devices, and cables for your  
system. This manual is intended to supplement the service information found in the  
Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.  
v
The Site and Hardware Planning Guide, order number SA38-0508, contains  
information to help you plan your installation.  
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in  
the United States, other countries, or both:  
v
v
v
v
AIX  
IBM  
RS/6000  
PowerPC  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of  
others.  
xvi 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1. Introducing the 44P Model 170  
The 7044 Model 170 servers combine PowerPC 604e microprocessor performance and  
system expandability, ensuring that your server adapts to handle ever-changing  
operating requirements. The 7044 Model 170 servers are specifically designed to  
support the demands of network environments.  
The 7044 Model 170 servers incorporate the peripheral component interconnect (PCI)  
bus, which is faster than the industry standard architecture (ISA) bus.  
This book helps you use the system, use diagnostics, use service aids, and verify  
system operation. This book also provides information to help you solve some of the  
simpler problems that might occur, and how to obtain assistance and service.  
System Features  
Bus Architecture  
Six PCI slots are available:  
v
v
Two 64-bit PCI full-size slots at 50 MHz (can also run at 33MHz), 3.3 volts  
Four 32-bit PCI full-size slots at 33 MHz, 5 volts  
Microprocessor  
v
One 333 MHz Power3+ microprocessor with 32KB instruction, 64KB data and 1MB  
L2 cache, OR  
v
v
One 400 MHz Power3+ microprocessor with 32KB instruction, 64KB data and 4MB  
L2 cache  
One 450 MHz Power3+ microprocessor with 32KB instruction, 64KB data and 8MB  
4-way L2 cache  
Memory  
v
256 MB (minimum) - 2 GB (maximum).  
Up to four dual inline memory-modules, installed in pairs, to support 128MB, 256MB  
or 512MB (must be installed in matched pairs).  
Media Drives  
v
v
3.5-inch, 1.44 MB Diskette Drive (standard)  
Internal Hard Disk Drives:  
–
–
9.1 GB Ultra SCSI Drive (standard)  
18.2 GB Ultra SCSI Drive  
Note: Larger sizes may be available. Contact your representative for additional  
information.  
–
Two media bays available  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
32x speed CD-ROM drive with sliding tray.  
Other Drives  
Drive bays can accommodate 5.25-inch or 3.5-inch drives such as hard disk drives,  
CD-ROM drives, tape drives, or other removable media drives.  
Power Supply  
v
390-watt, usable with 100-127 V ac (low voltage) or 200-240 V ac (high voltage).  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
v
v
Standard: 101-key Enhanced Keyboard  
101/102 or 106-key Enhanced Keyboard  
v
3-button  
Operator Panel  
v
v
32-character LED diagnostics display  
Power and Reset buttons  
Input/Output Ports  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
25-pin Parallel  
9-pin Serial (2)  
8-pin Tablet  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Ultra2 SCSI - LVD  
10Base5 Ethernet  
10BaseT or 100BaseTX Ethernet  
Audio Line-in  
Audio Line-out  
Microphone  
Headphone  
Security Features  
v
v
v
v
v
Power-on password  
Privileged-access password  
Security Bolt (optional)  
Key lock  
Unattended start mode  
2
44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front View  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
System Type and Model Number Identification Tag  
CD-ROM Drive  
Optional Media Bay  
Diskette Drive  
Operator Panel  
System Serial Number  
Chapter 1. Introducing the 44P Model 170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
 
Rear View  
20  
19  
1
2
18  
17  
3
4
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
5
9
8
7
6
1
Serial Number Label: For machine identification.  
2
1
2 and 3 9-Pin Serial Ports (  
) : For a TTY terminal, modem, or other serial  
devices.  
4
5
6
7
Keylock: For security.  
Security Bolt: Optional security measure.  
Adapter Slots (6): For adding PCI adapters.  
Empty Slot: This slot is not used.  
8
Ethernet Connector ( ) : For attaching your computer to an Ethernet/Twisted pair  
connection through a 10baseT connector.  
9
Headphones: For connecting headphones.  
10 Microphone: For connecting a microphone.  
4
44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11 and 12 Audio Ports:  
Audio line out  
Audio line in  
13 External SCSI Port (  
) : For connecting external SCSI devices.  
14 Parallel Port (  
15 Tablet Port (  
) : For connecting a parallel printer or other parallel devices.  
) : For attaching a digitizing tablet to your computer.  
16 Mouse Port ( ) : For mouse connection.  
17 Keyboard Port (  
) : For keyboard connection.  
18 10Base5 Ethernet Port ( ) : For attaching your computer to an Ethernet thick  
connection (or Ethernet thin connection, using an optional transceiver) through a  
10base5 connector.  
19 Status Light: For indicating power supply status.  
20 Power Connector: For connecting the power cable.  
Chapter 1. Introducing the 44P Model 170  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operator Panel  
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
1
2
3
4
Power On Switch: Turns system unit power on and off.  
Reset Switch: Function depends upon the operating system.  
Power-On LED: Glows when system unit is on.  
Hard Disk Drive Status LED: Glows when system unit is reading from or writing to  
the disk drive.  
5
Operator Panel Display: Displays current status of system unit startup, or  
diagnostic information in the event of a hardware problem.  
6
7
Headphone Jack: For connecting audio headphones.  
Microphone Receptacle: For connecting audio microphone.  
6
44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170  
This chapter provides information on how to start and use the system unit.  
Starting the System Unit  
1. Set the power switches of the attached devices to On.  
Note: When the system is plugged in but not powered on, the Power-On LED  
flashes slowly.  
2. If the LED is not flashing and OK is not displayed, ensure that the power cord,  
located at the back of the system unit, is plugged into a grounded electrical outlet.  
3. If this does not solve the problem, go to “Chapter 8. Hardware Problem  
Determination” on page 149.  
4. Press the Power-On switch (1).  
1
2
When you press the Power-On switch (1), the Power-On LED (2) comes on, and  
the system starts a POST (power-on self test).  
During POST, progress codes display in the operator panel display.  
5. If the Power-On LED does not come on and there is no indication of power when  
you press the Power-On switch, go to “Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination”  
on page 149.  
Stopping the System Unit  
Attention: When you use the shutdown procedure for your system, follow the correct  
shutdown procedure before you stop the system unit. Failure to do so can  
result in the loss of data. The System unit is powered down by the  
shutdown procedure.  
1. At a command line, enter shutdown command to stop the operating system.  
2. After you shut down the operating system, set the power switches of any attached  
devices to Off.  
3. If you will be servicing the system unit, unplug the system-unit power cable from the  
electrical outlet.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reading the Operator Panel Display  
The operator panel display is used to:  
v
v
v
Track the progress of the system unit self-tests and configuration program  
Display codes when the operating system comes to an abnormal end  
Display system messages  
Operator Panel  
1
2
3
4
6
5
7
1
2
3
4
Power On Switch: Turns system unit power on and off.  
Reset Switch: Function depends upon the operating system.  
Power-On LED: Glows when system unit is on.  
Hard Disk Drive Status LED: Glows when system unit is reading from or writing to  
the disk drive.  
5
Operator Panel Display: Displays current status of system unit startup, or  
diagnostic information in the event of a hardware problem.  
6
7
Headphone Jack: For connecting audio headphones.  
Microphone Receptacle: For connecting audio microphone.  
8
44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Keyboards  
There are several keyboards available for the system unit. The keyboards have various  
keys that enter data and control the cursor location. The keyboards can be engraved for  
the languages of different countries.  
The functions of each keyboard depend on the software used. The character sets for  
the keyboards are contained and explained in the documentation for your operating  
system.  
Function Keys  
Num  
Lock  
Caps  
Lock  
Scroll  
Lock  
Print  
Screen  
Scroll  
Lock  
Esc  
F1  
F
2
F
3
F4  
F5  
F6  
F
7
F
8
F9  
F10  
F11  
F12  
Pause  
Break  
SysRq  
_
-
!
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
&
7
*
8
(
)
+
=
Page  
Up  
Num  
Lock  
Backspace  
Insert  
/
*
-
Home  
1
6
9
0
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
I
O
P
7
8
9
Page  
Down  
Tab  
Delete  
End  
Home  
Pg Up  
+
4
5
2
6
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
K
L
:
;
"
,
Caps  
Lock  
Enter  
<
,
?
/
Z
X
C
V
B
N
M
>
.
1
3
Shift  
Shift  
End  
Pg Dn  
Enter  
.
0
Ctrl  
Alt  
Alt  
Ctrl  
Ins  
Del  
Numeric  
Keypad  
Control  
Keys  
Typewriter Keys  
The keyboard is divided into four sections:  
v
v
v
v
Function keys are multipurpose keys and their function is controlled by the operating  
system.  
Typewriter keys are similar to a standard typewriter. Their function is controlled by  
the software.  
Control keys move the cursor on the screen and do programmed control functions.  
The movement and functions depend upon the application used.  
Numeric keypad is arranged like a calculator to help when typing numbers.  
On all of the keyboards, you can adjust the tilt position for typing comfort. To tilt the  
keyboard, pull out on the keyboard legs. The legs snap into position. To decrease the  
tilt of the keyboard, rotate the keyboard legs until they snap into the bottom of the  
keyboard case.  
The keyboard cable plugs into the keyboard connector at the rear of the system unit.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Three-Button Mouse  
The mouse is a hand-operated locating device. A three-button mouse is available for  
use with the system unit. Consult your application publication for the exact use of the  
three-button mouse.  
You can use the mouse to perform such functions as positioning a cursor, selecting  
items from a menu, or moving around in your document much easier and faster than if  
you used only the keyboard. The cursor moves exactly as you move the mouse on a  
flat surface, such as a desktop.  
With the mouse buttons, you can perform functions such as selecting and deselecting  
options, extending your selection, or choosing a command. The precise function of your  
mouse depends on the software you are using.  
The mouse has a cable that plugs into the mouse connector at the rear of the system  
unit.  
Handling the Mouse Correctly  
For best operation, handle the mouse with care. Incorrect handling can damage the  
mouse.  
Do not:  
v
v
v
v
v
Operate the mouse on cloth, unfinished wood, newspaper, or carpet.  
Drop or hit the mouse.  
Carry the mouse by holding onto the cable.  
Expose the mouse to extreme temperatures or direct sunlight.  
Place the mouse in liquid spills.  
Caring for the Mouse  
The operating surface for the mouse should be smooth, clean, and flat. For example,  
you can operate the mouse on the following surfaces:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
Finished wood  
Glass  
Enamel  
Plastic  
Paper (except newspaper)  
Metal  
10 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rough surfaces collect contaminants that can be transferred to the interior of the mouse  
by the ball.  
Rough surfaces can also cause the pads located on the bottom of the mouse to  
prematurely wear. A deeply pitted surface could cause erratic operation of the mouse.  
The surface you use should be free from spills, dirt, dust, lint, wax, eraser dust, and  
other foreign matter.  
To care for the mouse:  
v
v
v
Inspect the work surface for spills or other contaminants.  
Dust the work surface.  
If you are using a paper pad, inspect it for wear and replace it if necessary.  
Cleaning the Mouse  
Use the following steps to clean the mMouse:  
1. Remove the retaining ring by turning it counterclockwise, in the direction of the  
arrow, as shown in the illustration.  
Retaining Ring  
Ball  
Cavity  
2. Remove the ball.  
3. Inspect the ball for contaminants. Wipe it clean with a dry, lint-free cloth.  
4. If the ball is dirty, wash it in warm, soapy water. Rinse and wipe the ball with a  
lint-free cloth until dry.  
5. Inspect the ball cavity in the mouse for foreign materials. If there are any foreign  
materials, remove them.  
6. Replace the ball.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Replace the retaining ring on the mouse and align it with the open slots in the ball  
cavity.  
8. Turn the retaining ring clockwise until the open slots are covered and you hear the  
ring snap into place.  
Using the 3.5-Inch Diskette Drive  
The system unit has a 1.44 MB diskette drive installed vertically in the front.  
The 1.44 MB diskette drive can format, read, and write diskettes compatible with the  
following diskette drives:  
v
v
1.0 MB diskettes with 720 KB formatted data capacity  
2.0 MB diskettes with 1.44 MB formatted data capacity (HD)  
Format the diskette according to its specified capacity.  
12 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Write-Protecting 3.5-Inch Diskettes  
Write-protecting diskettes is necessary so that important information is not accidentally  
lost. When diskettes are write-protected, you can read information from the diskettes,  
but you cannot write information to them.  
There is a write-protect tab on the 3.5-inch diskette. To locate the write-protect tab, turn  
the diskette over with the label facing down.  
To prevent writing onto a diskette, slide the write-protect tab to open the protect slot, as  
shown in the illustration.  
(Slot Open)  
Write-Protect Tab  
To allow writing onto a diskette, slide the write-protect tab to cover the protect slot, as  
shown in the illustration.  
(Slot Closed)  
Write-Protect Tab  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading and Unloading the 3.5-Inch Diskette  
To load a diskette into the drive, insert the diskette in the diskette drive with the labeled  
metal shutter first. Push the diskette into the drive until you hear a click. The click  
indicates that the diskette is securely in position in the drive.  
To unload the diskette, push the diskette-unload button. The diskette unloads partially  
from the drive. Remove the diskette.  
Using the CD-ROM Drive  
CAUTION:  
A Class 1 laser is contained in the device. Do not attempt to operate the device  
while it is disassembled. Do not attempt to open the covers of the device, as it is  
not serviceable and is to be replaced as a unit.  
This section describes the features of the 32X SCSI-2 CD-ROM Drive and provides  
instructions for handling the drive and CD-ROM discs. The CD-ROM is a half-high,  
5.25", 8-bit, single-ended, tray-loading drive. Its features include the following:  
v
v
SCSI-2 interface supports both synchronous and asynchronous data transfer  
High-speed data transfer rate of 2100 KB per second (14X) at inner diameter and  
4800 KB per second (32X) at outer diameter due to constant RPM spin rate  
v
v
v
High-speed synchronous burst rate of 10 MB per second  
Average random access time of 90 ms  
Loading tray accommodates both 8 cm discs (in the horizontal orientation only) and  
12 cm discs  
v
v
v
v
v
Reads multi-session discs  
Reads CD-recordable discs  
Reads CD-RW discs  
Supports all major CD-ROM formats: Mode 1, Mode 2, XA, CDDA, and audio  
Contains headphone output and line output for audio  
14 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front View of CD-ROM Drive  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Compact Disc Tray  
Emergency Eject Hole  
Headphone Jack  
Volume Control  
Status Light  
Load/Unload Button  
Understanding the Status Lights  
The status lights indicate the operational status of the drive. The various conditions are  
explained below.  
If light is:  
Off  
Condition is:  
Drive is in standby mode with or without a disc loaded.  
Any of the following:  
Blinking (green)  
v
v
v
Drive tray is inserted. The light blinks while the drive  
completes the initialization checkout.  
Drive is reading data. The light blinks while data is being  
read.  
Drive is in Play Audio Mode. The light blinks while the audio  
is playing.  
On (amber)  
Hardware error condition found during initialization.  
Note: If this occurs, contact your service representative.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Handling Compact Discs  
Compact discs are high-density media that must be handled with care and kept clean to  
ensure that they remain readable. Use the following precautions to ensure reliability:  
v
v
Hold the compact disc by the edges. Do not touch the surface of the compact disc.  
To remove dust or fingerprints, wipe the compact disc from the center to the outside  
of the compact disc as shown, using a lint-free cloth.  
Attention: Wiping the compact disc in a circular direction can cause loss of data.  
Do not write on the surface.  
v
v
v
v
Do not store or place the compact disc in direct sunlight.  
Do not use benzene, thinners, or other cleaners to clean the compact disc.  
Do not bend the compact disc.  
Other Handling Considerations  
Be sure to take the following additional precautions when you use the 32X SCSI-2  
CD-ROM Drive:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Remove compact discs from the tray before you move the drive anywhere.  
Do not place the drive where any of the following conditions exist:  
High temperature  
High humidity  
Excessive dust  
Excessive vibration or sudden shock  
Inclined surface  
Direct sunlight  
Do not insert foreign objects into the drive.  
Do not remove the drive covers or attempt to service the drive yourself.  
16 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading a Compact Disc  
To load a compact disc into the drive, do the following:  
1. Press the Load/Unload button to open the tray. The tray slides out of the drive.  
2. Place the compact disc in the tray with the label facing up.  
3. Press the Load/Unload button, or gently push in the tray, to close the tray.  
Note: Be sure that none of the vertical retaining tabs are extended when you use the  
drive in the horizontal position.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Opening the Tray Manually  
The compact disc tray automatically opens when you press the Load/Unload button. If it  
does not automatically open, follow these steps to force it open manually:  
1. Shut down and turn off the power to your system unit.  
2. Insert the straightened end of a paper clip into the emergency eject hole until you  
feel some resistance. See “Front View of CD-ROM Drive” on page 15 if you are not  
sure where the emergency eject hole is located.  
3. Continue to push in the paper clip while you pull out the tray with your fingernail.  
4. Pull the tray completely open and remove the disc. It is normal for the tray to make  
a clicking sound while you are pulling it open.  
Playing an Audio CD  
To play an audio CD, you must have headphones connected to the headphone jack  
located on the front of the drive, or connected to the line-out connector located on the  
back of the system. You must also have an audio software application installed.  
The headphone jack provides the connection for headphones using a 3.5 mm (1/8")  
stereo mini-plug. The volume control adjusts the audio output level for the headphones.  
General Information for the 8mm Tape Drive  
The 8mm Tape Drive is an internal streaming tape drive that provides medium to  
high-capacity backup and archival capability, as well as a high data-transfer rate. The  
8mm Tape Drive uses wide bus architecture. Communications on the SCSI bus can be  
either asynchronous or synchronous. The 8mm Tape Drive is read only compatible with  
existing 2.3 GB, 5.0 GB, and 7.0 GB 8 mm tape drives. The 8mm Tape Drive is a boot  
device.  
The tape drive is used primarily for:  
v
v
v
Saving and restoring system data files  
Archiving important records  
Distributing operating system software upgrades  
The drive conforms to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) SCSI-2  
standard.  
Features of the 8mm Tape Drive include:  
v
v
Use of 8 mm data cartridges.  
Compression capability, effectively doubling the native capacity and data rate. The  
actual capacity per cartridge varies depending on the application and the type of data  
cartridge being used.  
18 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The factory default setting is Activated. Data compression is usually controlled  
by the application software.  
v
v
v
A half-high 5.25-inch form-factor.  
An LCD display that provides operating and error messages.  
Status lights that indicate:  
–
–
–
When it is time to clean the tape drive  
When the tape is in motion  
When the drive is ready to accept tape motion commands  
Front View of the 8mm Tape Drive  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Disturbance (amber)  
Ready (green)  
Activity (green)  
Status lights  
LCD display  
Tape drive door  
Unload button  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Recommendations  
Attention: Be sure to read ″Handling Static-Sensitive Devices″ in the RS/6000 44P  
Series Model 170 Installation Guide, order number SA38-0561, Installing  
and Removing devices chapter before you remove the 8mm Tape Drive  
from its anti static bag or any time you handle it. For optimum performance,  
always follow the recommendations listed below:  
v
v
v
Handle the drive carefully and by its external metal chassis. Keep your hands away  
from the printed circuit boards, components, and printed circuit (flex) cables.  
If possible, work on a cushioned surface, and do not drop the tape drive onto the  
work surface.  
If you move the tape drive to an environment that is colder or warmer than its  
previous environment, keep the drive in its package and allow the package to reach  
the current room temperature. This prevents potential data loss or damage to the  
tape drive. Allow one hour of acclimation for each 10 degrees C (18 degrees F)  
difference between the shipping and/or storage temperature and the room  
temperature.  
v
v
v
Use only high-quality data grade 8 mm tape cartridges recommended by the  
manufacturer (see “Obtaining Additional Tape Cartridges” on page 29).  
Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive when it is not in use, and store the  
cartridge in the cartridge case.  
Do not open the door on the data tape cartridge. This door covers and protects the  
magnetic tape material from dirt, dust, and damage.  
v
v
Avoid touching the tape, as doing so can cause loss of data.  
Back up any tape cartridge that repeatedly produces error messages, then discard  
the old tape cartridge. Error information is saved in the system error log.  
v
Clean the tape path regularly according to the cleaning procedure described in  
“Cleaning the Tape Drive” on page 27. Use only recommended cleaning cartridges.  
Other cleaning cartridges can permanently damage the tape drive.  
8 mm Tape Cartridge Types  
There are different types of 8 mm tape cartridges that you can use for the following  
purposes:  
Type  
Purpose  
Test Tape Cartridge  
Checks the operation of the drive or to run  
diagnostics. Do not use it to save programs or  
data. This cartridge, which is specially labeled,  
is included with the 8mm Tape Drive.  
Data Tape Cartridge  
Saves your programs or data. This cartridge is  
included with the 8mm Tape Drive.  
Cleaning Tape Cartridge  
Cleans the 8 mm tape drive. See “Cleaning the  
Tape Drive” on page 27. This cartridge is  
included with the 8mm Tape Drive.  
20 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tape Cartridge Compatibility  
The 8mm Tape Drive is compatible with existing 8 mm tape subsystems that comply to  
the American National Standard (ANSI) X3B5–89-136, Rev. 6, Helical-scan Digital  
Computer Tape Cartridge, 8 mm for Information Exchange. Refer to the following table  
for information about specific tape compatibility.  
Format Modes (C=compression mode)  
8mm Tape  
Drive  
2.3GB  
2.3 GB (C) 5.0 GB  
5.0 GB (C) 7.0 GB  
7.0 GB (C) 20.0 GB  
20.0 GB  
(C)  
2.3 GB  
5.0 GB  
7.0 GB  
20.0 GB  
Read /  
Write  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Read Only  
-
Read Only Read Only Read Only Read Only  
Read /  
Write  
Read /  
Write  
Setting the Write-Protect Tab on 8 mm Tape Cartridges  
Set the write-protect tab on a tape cartridge so that you do not accidentally lose  
information. The window on the tape cartridge controls write-protection. When the  
window on a tape cartridge is closed, write-protection is set and information can be  
read from the tape, but not written to it. When the window on a tape cartridge is open,  
write-protection is not set and information can be read from the tape and written to it.  
1
2
Window open: Write-protect tab not set  
Window closed: Write-protect tab set  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Environmental Considerations for 8 mm Data Cartridges  
This section describes operating and storage conditions including temperature, relative  
humidity, and maximum wet bulb data.  
Attention: The manufacturer specifies a set of temperature and humidity ranges in  
which the 8 mm data cartridge can operate with ease. Only regular cleaning  
procedures are required when operating the cartridge within this range. The  
risk of possible data loss is increased if 8 mm tape cartridges are operated,  
stored, or shipped outside the temperature or humidity ranges shown in the  
following table.  
Condition  
Temperature  
Operating Ranges  
Storage  
Shipping  
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C) 41°F-90°F (5°C-32°C)  
-40°F-126°F  
(-40°C-52°C)  
Relative Humidity  
(non-condensing)  
20%-80%  
20%-80%  
20%-80%  
Maximum Wet Bulb  
73°F (23°C)  
79°F (26°C)  
79°F (26°C)  
Always let a cartridge acclimate to the operating environment before you use it.  
Acclimation is necessary for any data cartridge that has been exposed to a different  
humidity environment or to a temperature change of 11°C or 20°F or more. Place the  
cartridge, with its container, in the operating environment for as long as it has been  
away from the operating environment or for 24 hours, whichever is less.  
Operating the 8mm Tape Drive in Harsh Environments  
The 8mm Tape Drive is ideally suited to streaming operations rather than tape  
movement operations involving multiple stops and starts as well as random searches.  
You should use streaming movement whenever possible.  
Do not use for archiving any tape that was previously used outside the ranges specified  
in “Environmental Considerations for 8 mm Data Cartridges” for an extended period of  
time. Exposure to the new environment deteriorates the magnetic and physical strength  
of the tape. Do not store important data on a tape that was used outside the specified  
ranges. For reliable archiving, transfer the data to a new tape.  
Erasing 8 mm Data Cartridge  
Most bulk eraser devices cannot erase 8 mm data cartridges. To properly erase an 8  
mm data cartridge with a bulk eraser device, the erasure rating must be at least 1500  
oersted.  
22 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the 8mm Tape Drive  
This section provides information about operating, using, and maintaining your 8mm  
Tape Drive.  
Status Lights  
The 8mm Tape Drive has two green status lights and one amber status light. The on  
and off combinations of the status lights indicate the current condition of the tape drive.  
Each of the International Organization for Standards (IOS) symbols located next to a  
status light indicates a specific condition of the tape drive as follows:  
1
20.0  
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Disturbance (amber)  
Ready (green)  
Activity (green)  
Status lights  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status  
Disturbance Ready (green)  
(amber)  
Activity  
(green)  
The power-on self-test (POST) is running or  
the system has issued a Reset to the drive.  
On  
On  
On  
One of the following has occurred:  
Off/On  
Off  
Off  
v
v
The power is off.  
The POST has completed successfully, but  
no tape cartridge has been inserted.  
See note 2.  
A tape cartridge has been inserted, and the  
8mm Tape Drive is ready to receive  
commands from the system. See note 2.  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Flashing  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
Flashing  
Flashing  
Off  
A tape cartridge has been inserted, and the  
8mm Tape Drive is performing a tape load or  
unload operation. See note 2.  
The tape is in motion, and the 8mm Tape  
Drive is busy running a device operation. See  
note 2.  
On  
The 8mm Tape Drive has detected an internal  
fault that requires corrective action. See note  
1.  
Off  
The tape path requires cleaning. Refer to  
“Cleaning the Tape Drive” on page 27.  
Off or On  
Off or Flashing  
Notes:  
1. If a fault or an error condition occurs, press the unload button for approximately 15  
seconds to reset the drive. If the disturbance light still flashes after the reset,  
contact your service representative for assistance.  
2. If the disturbance light is on, cleaning is required. See “Cleaning the Tape Drive” on  
page 27.  
Liquid Crystal Display  
The 8mm Tape Drive features a liquid crystal display (LCD), which is located on the  
front panel. The LCD displays operating and error messages.  
Changing the Display Language  
The text on the 8mm Tape Drive LCD is available in several languages. To change the  
language:  
1. Press and hold the unload button after you turn the power on to the 8mm Tape  
Drive or, if your system unit is already running, press and hold the unload button for  
approximately 15 seconds until the LCD displays RESET. Release the unload button  
for approximately one second, then press and hold the unload button again.  
2. After the LCD cycles through all the reset messages, it cycles through the available  
languages. When the desired language displays, release the unload button.  
24 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading the 8 mm Tape Cartridge  
Before loading the tape cartridge, make sure the system unit power is on and that the  
write-protect tab on the tape cartridge is properly set. Refer to “Setting the Write-Protect  
Tab on 8 mm Tape Cartridges” on page 21. The tape drive loads the tape from the  
cartridge and prepares it for reading and writing.  
1
2
3
Window side of tape cartridge  
8 mm tape cartridge  
Write-protect tab  
To load the 8 mm tape cartridge:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 8 mm tape cartridge with the write-protect tab toward you  
and the window side of the cartridge facing up.  
2. Slide the tape cartridge into the opening on the front of the 8 mm tape drive until  
the loading mechanism pulls the cartridge into the drive and the drive door closes.  
The ready status light (green) comes on if the load operation was successful.  
The service processor is ready for data operations when the tape cartridge is inserted.  
After the cartridge is inserted into the tape drive, the tape takes about 25 seconds to  
load.  
Commands can be entered while the tape is loading. Any commands to the tape drive  
start running once the tape has finished loading. Commands not requiring the tape  
cartridge are run immediately.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unloading the 8 mm Tape Cartridge  
Before you perform the unload operation, make sure the power to the system unit is on.  
1
2
3
4
Window side of tape cartridge  
8 mm tape cartridge  
Write-protect tab  
Unload button  
To unload and eject the tape cartridge, press the unload button. The service processor  
rewinds the tape, then ejects the tape cartridge from the tape drive. After you press the  
unload button, the following actions occur:  
v
v
v
The ready status light goes off.  
The read/write status light flashes during the unload operation.  
The read/write status light goes off when the cartridge is ejected from the tape drive.  
The time required for a tape to rewind and unload is between 18 seconds and 3  
minutes, depending on the position of the tape when you push the unload button.  
If a fault or an error condition occurs and you cannot eject the tape, press the unload  
button for approximately 15 seconds to reset the drive. If the tape cartridge cannot  
unload and has to be removed manually from the drive, contact your service  
representative.  
26 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Tape Drive  
Attention: Do not use video-cleaning cartridges in the 8mm Tape Drive. Video-cleaning  
cartridges can damage the system drive.  
Clean the tape drive:  
v
After you use a metal particle (MP) tape and before you use an advanced metal  
evaporative (AME) tape  
v
v
When error rates exceed an acceptable level as indicated by the LED and message  
Every 72 hours of tape motion as indicated by the LED and message  
The 8mm Tape Drive counts the number of hours of tape motion. When it is time to  
clean the tape path, it displays the message * * CLEAN SOON and turns on the top  
status light.  
You must clean the tape after using metal particle (MP) media and before using  
advanced metal evaporative (AME) tapes. If you use MP media, the LCD prompts you  
to clean the tape path by displaying the message MUST CLEAN.  
More frequent cleaning may be required if you operate the drive in a dusty environment  
or in humid conditions. If you allow dust to accumulate, the drive has to perform more  
reads and writes. This can damage the drive or cause data loss, which can be  
prevented by regular cleaning.  
The cleaning cartridge cleans the 8mm Tape Drive 18 times before you must discard it.  
If you attempt to use an 8 mm cleaning cartridge more than 18 times, the tape drive  
automatically detects the error, ejects the cleaning cartridge with the amber disturbance  
status light remaining on, and displays the message DEPLETED.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before you load the cleaning cartridge, make sure the power to the tape drive is on.  
1
2
3
Window side of tape cartridge  
8 mm cleaning cartridge  
Write-protect tab  
To clean the tape path:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 8 mm cleaning cartridge with the window side of the  
cartridge facing up. Slide the cartridge into the opening on the front of the 8mm  
Tape Drive until the loading mechanism pulls it into the drive.  
2. After you fully insert the 8 mm cleaning cartridge into the 8mm Tape Drive, the  
following cleaning operations are automatically performed:  
v
v
v
The cleaning tape loads into the tape path. The message CLEANING... displays.  
The cleaning cycles take approximately two minutes.  
The tape unloads and the cleaning cartridge ejects from the tape drive upon  
completion of the cleaning operation.  
The amber disturbance status light goes off if the cleaning operation was  
successful.  
3. Record the use of the cleaning cartridge on the cartridge.  
28 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Obtaining Additional Tape Cartridges  
Use only tape cartridges recommended by the manufacturer in the 8mm Tape Drive.  
Contact your customer service representative or the place of purchase to obtain the  
recommended tape cartridges.  
General information for the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive  
The 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive is an internal streaming tape drive that provides medium  
to high-capacity backup and archival capability as well as high data transfer rate. The  
12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive uses NARROW bus (8-bit) architecture. Communications on  
the SCSI bus can be either asynchronous or synchronous. The 12/24GB 4mm Tape  
Drive is compatible with existing 2.0 GB and 4.0 GB 4 mm tape drives. The 12/24GB  
4mm Tape Drive can be used as a boot device.  
The tape drive is used primarily for:  
v
v
v
Saving and restoring system data files  
Archiving important records  
Distributing operating system software upgrades.  
The drive conforms to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) SCSI-2  
standard.  
The 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive’s features include:  
v
v
v
v
Use of 12/24 GB 4 mm data cartridges.  
Data rate of 1.1 MB/second.  
Capacity of 12 GB.  
Compression capability, which effectively doubles the native capacity of 12 GB and  
the effective data rate. The actual capacity per cartridge varies depending on the  
application and the type of data cartridge being used. The default is compressed.  
Use SMIT to change the default.  
Note: The factory default setting is Activated. Data compression is usually controlled  
by the application software.  
v
v
A half-high 5.25-inch form-factor.  
Status lights that indicate:  
–
–
–
When it is time to clean the tape drive  
When the tape is in motion  
When the drive is ready to accept tape motion commands.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Front View of the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive  
1
3
4
5
2
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tape Drive Door  
Status lights  
Ready (green)  
Tape Motion (green)  
Disturbance (amber)  
Unload/Reset button  
Using the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive  
This chapter provides information about operating, using, and maintaining your 12/24GB  
4mm Tape Drive.  
Operating Recommendations  
Attention: For optimum performance, always follow the recommendations listed below:  
v
Use only high-quality data grade 12/24 GB 4 mm tape cartridges recommended by  
the manufacturer (see “Obtaining Additional Tape Cartridges” on page 38). Tape  
cartridges that do not carry the proper DDS symbol cannot be written to, and their  
use causes the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive to report an error.  
v
v
Remove the tape cartridge from the tape drive when it is not in use, and store the  
cartridge in the cartridge case.  
Do not open the door on the data tape cartridge. This door covers and protects the  
magnetic tape material from dirt, dust, and damage.  
v
v
Avoid touching the tape, as doing so can cause loss of data.  
Back up any tape cartridge that repeatedly produces error messages, then discard  
the old tape cartridge. Error information is saved in the system error log.  
v
Clean the tape path regularly according to the cleaning procedure described in  
“Cleaning the Tape Path on the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive” on page 37. Use only  
recommended cleaning cartridges. Other cleaning cartridges can permanently  
damage the tape drive.  
30 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridge Types  
There are different types of 12/24 GB 4 mm tape cartridges that you can use for the  
following purposes:  
Type  
Purpose  
Test Tape Cartridge  
Checks the operation of the drive or to run  
diagnostics. Do not use it to save programs or  
data. This cartridge, which is specially labeled,  
is included with the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive.  
Data Tape Cartridge  
Saves your programs or data. This cartridge is  
included with the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive.  
Cleaning Tape Cartridge  
Cleans the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive. See  
“Cleaning the Tape Path on the 12/24GB 4mm  
Tape Drive” on page 37. This cartridge is  
included with the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive.  
Tape Cartridge Compatibility  
The tape drive is compatible with existing 12/24 GB 4 mm tape subsystems that are  
designed to operate with Digital Data Storage approved media (DDS-1, DDS||||, DDS-2,  
or DDS-3), which meet the following European Computer Manufacturers Association  
(ECMA) standards:  
v
v
v
ECMA–139 “3.81 Wide Magnetic Tape Cartridge for Information Interchange” –  
Helical Scan Recording – DDS Format.  
ECMA–139 “3.81 Wide Magnetic Tape Cartridge for Information Interchange” –  
Helical Scan Recording – DDS–2 Format.  
ECMA–139 “3.81 Wide Magnetic Tape Cartridge for Information Interchange” –  
Helical Scan Recording – DDS–3 Format.  
4 mm Tape Write Density Setting  
When reading a tape, the drive automatically determines which format is written on the  
tape.  
When writing to a tape, use SMIT (System Management Interface Tool) to change the  
density setting of the tape drive to correspond to the type of media installed. Refer to  
the following table for information about the specific density setting:  
Density Settings for 4 mm Media  
Media Type  
DDS1  
Device Compatibility  
Read Only  
SMIT Density Setting  
N/A  
19  
DDS||||  
DDS2  
Read / Write (2.0 GB Mode Only)  
Read / Write (4.0 GB Mode Only)  
Read / Write (12.0 GB Mode Only)  
36  
DDS3  
37  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting the Write-Protect Tab on 12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridges  
Set the write-protect tab on a tape cartridge so that you do not accidentally lose  
information. The write-protect tab on the tape cartridge controls write-protection. When  
the write-protect tab on a tape cartridge is closed, information can be read from the  
tape and written to it. When the write-protect tab on a tape cartridge is open,  
information can be read from the tape, but not written to it.  
1
2
Write-protect tab closed: Write enabled  
Write-protect tab open: Write disabled  
Erasing 12/24 GB 4 mm Data Cartridge  
Most bulk eraser devices cannot erase 12/24 GB 4 mm data cartridges. To properly  
erase an 12/24 GB 4 mm data cartridge with a bulk eraser device, the erasure rating  
must be at least 3900 oersted.  
Environmental Considerations for 12/24 GB 4 mm Data Cartridges  
This section describes operating and storage conditions including temperature, relative  
humidity, and maximum wet bulb data.  
Attention: The manufacturer specifies a set of temperature and humidity ranges in  
which the 12/24 GB 4 mm data cartridge can operate with ease. Only  
regular cleaning procedures are required when operating the cartridge  
within this range. The risk of possible data loss is increased if 12/24 GB 4  
mm tape cartridges are operated, stored, or shipped outside the  
temperature or humidity ranges shown in the following table.  
Condition  
Temperature  
Operating Ranges  
Storage  
Shipping  
60°F-90°F (16°C-32°C) 41°F-90°F (5°C-32°C)  
-40°F-126°F  
(-40°C-52°C)  
Relative Humidity  
(non-condensing)  
20%-80%  
20%-80%  
20%-80%  
Maximum Wet Bulb  
79°F (26°C)  
79°F (26°C)  
79°F (26°C)  
32 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Always let a cartridge acclimate to the operating environment before you use it.  
Acclimation is necessary for any data cartridge that has been exposed to a different  
humidity environment or to a temperature change of 11°C (20°F) or more. Place the  
cartridge, with its container, in the operating environment for as long as it has been  
away from the operating environment or for 24 hours, whichever is less.  
Operating the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive in Harsh Environments  
The tape drive is ideally suited to streaming operations rather than tape movement  
operations involving multiple stops and starts and random searches. You should use  
streaming movement whenever possible.  
Do not use for archiving any tape that was previously used outside the ranges specified  
in “Environmental Considerations for 12/24 GB 4 mm Data Cartridges” on page 32 for  
an extended period of time. Exposure to the new environment deteriorates the magnetic  
and physical strength of the tape. Do not store important data on a tape that was used  
outside the specified ranges. For reliable archiving, transfer the data to a new tape.  
Status Lights  
The 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive has two green status lights and one amber status light.  
The on and off combinations of the status lights indicate the conditions of the 12/24GB  
4mm Tape Drive.  
Each of the International Organization for Standards (ISO) symbols located above a  
status light indicates a specific condition of the tape drive as follows:  
1
3
4
5
2
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tape Drive Door  
Status lights  
Ready (green)  
Tape Motion (green)  
Disturbance (amber)  
Unload/Reset button  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Light States  
The following tables explain the meaning of the green and amber status lights.  
Status  
Ready (green)  
Tape Motion (green)  
Disturbance (amber)  
Off  
No cartridge installed or  
error condition  
No cartridge or no activity  
No error condition  
Steady  
Cartridge installed or  
loading/unloading  
Cleaning required or worn  
media  
Flashing  
Power-on self-test in  
progress  
Cartridge activity  
Error condition  
Status Lights on the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive  
Status  
Ready (green)  
Tape Motion  
(green)  
Disturbance  
(amber)  
LED test  
On 2 seconds at  
power on  
On 2 seconds at  
power on  
On 2 seconds at  
power on  
The power-on self-test (POST) is running or the  
diagnostic cartridge is running.  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
One of the following has occurred:  
Off  
Off  
Off/On  
v
v
The power is off.  
The POST has completed successfully, but no tape  
cartridge has been loaded.  
(See note 2 below.)  
A tape cartridge has been inserted and the 12/24GB  
4mm Tape Drive is ready to receive commands from the  
system. (See note 2 below.)  
On  
Off  
Off/On  
Off/On  
Flashing  
On  
The tape is in motion and the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive On  
is running a device operation or cleaning. (See note 2  
below.)  
Flashing  
Off  
The 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive has detected an internal Off  
error that requires corrective action such as tape  
cartridge failure, high humidity. (See note 1 below.)  
The tape path requires cleaning, or a poor quality tape  
cartridge is being used. See “Cleaning the Tape Path on  
the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive” on page 37.  
Off or On  
Off or Flashing  
Notes:  
1. If a fault or an error condition occurs, press the unload button for approximately 15  
seconds to reset the drive. If the disturbance light still flashes after the reset,  
contact your service representative for assistance.  
2. If the disturbance light is on, cleaning is required. See “Cleaning the Tape Path on  
the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive” on page 37.  
34 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loading the 12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridge  
Before you load the tape cartridge, make sure the power is on and the write-protect tab  
on the tape cartridge is properly set. Refer to “Setting the Write-Protect Tab on 12/24  
GB 4 mm Tape Cartridges” on page 32. The tape drive loads the tape from the cartridge  
and prepares it for reading and writing.  
To load the 12/24 GB 4 mm tape cartridge, do the following:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 12/24 GB 4 mm tape cartridge with the write-protect tab  
towards you and the window side of the cartridge facing up.  
2. Slide the tape cartridge into the opening on the front of the 12/24 GB 4 mm tape  
drive until the loading mechanism pulls the cartridge into the drive and the drive  
door closes. The ready status light (green) goes on if the load operation was  
successful.  
4 mm Tape Cartridge  
Window Side of  
Tape Cartridge  
Write-Protect Tab  
Ready Status  
Light (Green)  
Unload Button  
The 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive is ready for data operations when the tape cartridge is  
inserted. After the cartridge is inserted into the tape drive, the tape takes about 15  
seconds to load.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Unloading the 12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Cartridge  
Before performing the unload operation, make sure the power to the system unit is on.  
To unload and eject the tape cartridge, press the unload button. The 12/24GB 4mm  
Tape Drive rewinds the tape and then ejects the tape cartridge from the tape drive.  
After you press the unload button, the following occurs:  
1. The Ready status light turns off.  
2. The Tape Motion status light flashes during the unload operation.  
3. The Tape Motion status light turns off when the cartridge is ejected from the tape  
drive.  
Write-Protect Tab  
4 mm Tape Cartridge  
Ready Status  
Light (Green)  
Unload Button  
Ready-Write Status  
Light (Green)  
The time required for a tape to rewind and unload is between 10 seconds and 1.5  
minutes, depending on the position of the tape when the unload button is pushed.  
If a fault or an error condition occurs and you cannot eject the tape, press the unload  
button for approximately 15 seconds to reset the drive.  
If the tape cartridge cannot unload and has to be removed manually from the drive,  
contact your service representative.  
36 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cleaning the Tape Path on the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive  
The 12/24 GB 4 mm tape path should be cleaned either approximately every 30 hours  
of tape motion or once a month, whichever occurs first. The 12/24 GB 4 mm tape drive  
monitors the recording quality of the tape cartridge and indicates that the tape path  
requires cleaning when the disturbance status light (amber) is on.  
More frequent cleaning may be required if the drive is operated in a dusty environment  
or in humid conditions. If the dust is allowed to accumulate, the drive has to perform  
more reads and writes. This can cause data loss, and can be prevented by regularly  
scheduled cleaning of the drive. The amber Disturbance status light also comes on  
automatically after 30 hours of tape motion without cleaning.  
If you attempt to use a 12/24 GB 4 mm cleaning cartridge beyond 20 cleanings, the  
tape drive automatically detects an error and ejects the cleaning cartridge with the  
disturbance status light (amber) remaining on.  
Before you load the cleaning cartridge, make sure the power to the system unit is on.  
To load the 12/24 GB 4 mm cleaning cartridge, do the following:  
1. Grasp the edges of the 12/24 GB 4 mm cleaning cartridge with the window side of  
the cartridge facing up.  
2. Slide the cleaning cartridge into the opening on the front of the 12/24 GB 4 mm  
tape drive until the loading mechanism pulls the cartridge into the drive.  
Window Side of  
Cleaning Cartridge  
4 mm Cleaning Cartridge  
Unload Button  
Disturbance Status  
Light (Amber)  
After the 12/24 GB 4 mm cleaning cartridge has been fully inserted into the 12/24GB  
4mm Tape Drive, the following cleaning operations are performed automatically:  
1. The cleaning tape is loaded into the tape path. The cleaning cycle lasts  
approximately 30 seconds.  
2. The tape is unloaded and the cleaning cartridge is ejected from the tape drive when  
the cleaning operation is complete.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. A successful cleaning operation is indicated when the disturbance status light  
(amber) goes off (if it was activated before the cleaning operation).  
Obtaining Additional Tape Cartridges  
The following table lists the tape cartridges that you can order for the 12/24GB 4mm  
Tape Drive. Contact your customer service representative or the place of purchase to  
obtain the recommended tape cartridges.  
Tape Cartridges for the 12/24 GB 4 mm Tape Drive  
Part Number  
59H3465  
Type of Cartridge  
Length  
160 m (525 ft)  
11.5 m (37.7 ft)  
N/A  
12/24 GB 4 mm Data Cartridge  
12/24 GB 4 mm Test Cartridge  
12/24 GB 4 mm Cleaning Cartridge  
59H3466  
59H3090  
Using the Service Processor and Service Director Features  
The Service Processor and Service Director features protect users against unnecessary  
system downtime by keeping support personnel (both internal and external) aware of  
any unexpected changes in the system environment. In combination, the two features  
provide a flexible solution to automated system maintenance.  
Service Processor  
The Service Processor runs on its own power boundary and continually monitors  
hardware attributes, the AIX Operating System, and the environmental conditions within  
the system. Any system failure which prevents the system from coming back to an  
operational state (a fully functional AIX Operating System) is reported by the Service  
Processor. The Service Processor is controlled by firmware and does not require the  
AIX Operating System to be operational to perform its tasks. If any system failures are  
detected, the Service Processor has the ability to take predetermined corrective actions.  
The methods of corrective actions are:  
v
v
v
Surveillance  
Call Home  
AIX Operating System Monitoring  
Surveillance is a function in which the Service Processor monitors the system through  
heartbeat communication with the system firmware. The heartbeat is a periodic signal  
that the firmware can monitor. During system startup, the firmware surveillance monitor  
is automatically enabled to check for heartbeats from the firmware. If a heartbeat is not  
detected within a default period, the Service Processor cycles the system power and  
attempts to restart until the system either restarts successfully, or a predetermined retry  
threshold is reached. In the event the Service Processor is unsuccessful in bringing the  
system online (or in the event that the user asked to be alerted to any Service  
Processor assisted restarts), the system can call home to report the error.  
38 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Call Home function can be initialized to call either a service center telephone  
number, a customer administration center, or a digital pager telephone number. The  
Service Processor can be configured to stop at the first successful call to any of the  
numbers listed, or can be configured to call every number provided. If connected to the  
service center, the Service Processor transmits the relevant system information (the  
system’s serial number and model type) and Service Request Number (SRN). If  
connected to a digital pager service, the Service Processor inputs a Customer Voice  
Telephone Number defined by the customer. An established sequence of digits or the  
telephone number to a phone near the failed system could be used to signal a system  
administrator to a potential system failure.  
During normal operations, the Service Processor can also be configured to monitor the  
AIX Operating System. If AIX does not respond to the Service Processor heartbeat, the  
Service Processor assumes the Operating System is hung. The Service Processor can  
automatically initiate a restart and, if enabled, initiate the call home function to alert the  
appropriate parties to the system hang. Enabling Operating System Surveillance also  
affords AIX the means to detect any Service Processor failures and report those failures  
to the Service Director application.  
Unlike the Service Director, the Service Processor cannot be configured in a  
client/server environment where one system can be used to manage all dial-out  
functionally for a set of systems.  
Prior to installing the Service Processor feature, ensure that you have the latest levels  
of Service Processor microcode and system firmware. You also need a properly  
configured modem. For more information on configuring a modem, see “Modem  
Configuration Menu” on page 54.  
Service Director  
The Service Director is a software extension to the AIX Operating System that monitors  
the system while the AIX Operating System is running. The Service Director monitors  
and analyzes all recoverable system failures, and, if needed, can automatically place a  
service call to a service center (without user intervention).  
The service center receives the machine type/serial number, host name, SRN, and a  
problem description. The service center analyzes the problem report and, if warranted,  
dispatches a service person to the customer site. The service center also determines if  
any hardware components need to be ordered prior to the service person’s arrival.  
The Service Director code also gives the user the option to establish a single system as  
the problem reporting server. A single system, accessible over the user network, can be  
used as the central server for all the other systems on the Local Area Network (LAN)  
who are running the Service Director application. If the Service Director application on a  
remote client decides a service request needs to be placed, the client forwards the  
information to the Service Director server who dials the service center telephone  
number from its locally attached modem. In this scenario, the user only needs to  
maintain a single analog line for providing call-out capabilities for a large set of servers.  
Chapter 2. Using the 44P Series Model 170 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When used in a Scalable Parallel (SP) environment, a client/server type implementation  
is configured. The Service Director client code runs on each of the Scalable Parallel  
(SP) nodes. The server component runs on the Control Workstation. In the event of any  
system failures, the relevant information is transmitted to the Control Workstation  
through the integrated Ethernet. Once alerted to the system failure, the Control  
Workstation initiates actions to prepare and send the service request.  
A modem is required for enabling automated problem reporting to the service center.  
Configuration files for several types of modems are included as part of the Service  
Director package. Refer to “Modem Configuration Menu” on page 54 for more  
information on configuring your modem.  
40 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor  
The service processor menus enable you to configure service processor options and to  
enable and disable functions.  
service processor menus are available using an ASCII terminal when the server is  
turned off and the service processor is operating with standby power. service processor  
menus are also available when server power is on and the service processor has  
detected a server problem (such as loss of surveillance).  
During the first power-up (that is, the power cord is plugged into the outlet), service  
processor menus are not available for 45 seconds while the service processor is  
running self-tests and initializing the server. If the server powers down, service  
processor menus become available after 15 seconds.  
For a summary of the service processor functions and the methods for invoking them,  
see the table below.  
Service Processor Functions  
Service  
Processor  
Service  
Processor  
SMS (ASCII or  
graphics  
Menus (ASCII Service Aids  
terminals)  
terminals)  
(ASCII or  
graphics  
terminals)  
View System Environmental Conditions  
Read System POST Errors  
Read Service Processor Error Logs  
View Progress Indicators from last Boot  
Power-on System  
Y3  
Y3  
Y3  
Y3  
Y3  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Power-off System  
Read NVRAM  
Reset Service Processor  
Setup Reboot/Restart Policy  
Start Talk Mode  
Enable/Disable Console Mirroring  
Select Modem Line Speed  
Enable/Disable Modem  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Y1  
Setup Modem Configuration  
Setup Ring Indicate Power-On  
Setup Dial-out Phone Numbers  
Setup Surveillance  
Update Service Processor Flash EPROM  
Change General-Access Password  
Y2  
Y2  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Processor Functions  
Service  
Processor  
Service  
Processor  
SMS (ASCII or  
graphics  
Menus (ASCII Service Aids  
terminals)  
terminals)  
(ASCII or  
graphics  
terminals)  
Change Privileged Access Password  
Select Language  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Y2  
Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode  
1
2
3
Operating system root password Privileged-access password General-Access  
password  
Service Processor Menus  
The service processor menus are divided into two groups:  
v
v
General user menus - the user must know the general-access password.  
Privileged user menus - the user must know the privileged-access password.  
The following section describes these two groups of menus, how to access them, and  
the functions associated with each option.  
When the server is powered down, the service processor menus can be accessed  
locally or remotely.  
Service Processor Menu Inactivity  
To prevent loss of control in unstable power environments, the service processor leaves  
the menu mode after five minutes of inactivity. Return to the menus by pressing any key  
on the terminal, local or remote.  
Accessing Service Processor Menus Locally  
Service Processor menus can be accessed locally by connecting an ASCII terminal to  
either serial port. Because the presence of the ASCII terminal cannot be confirmed by  
the service processor, you must press a key on the ASCII terminal to confirm its  
presence. The service processor then prompts you for a password (if set), and when  
verified, displays the service processor menus.  
Accessing Service Processor Menus Remotely  
Service Processor menus can be accessed remotely by connecting a modem to serial  
port 1 or serial port 2, as follows:  
1. Turn off the server, unplug the power cord, and press the Power button to drain  
capacitance while power is disconnected.  
2. Connect the modem to the appropriate serial port and turn on the modem.  
3. Plug in the server.  
Note:  
42 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If your modem has not been configured, go to “Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu” on  
page 54 with a terminal or terminal emulator, call the server’s modem.  
The service processor prompts you for a password (if set), and when verified,  
displays the service processor menus.  
General User Menu  
The menu options presented to the general user are a subset of the options available to  
the privileged user. The user must know the General-Access password, if set, to access  
these menus.  
GENERAL USER MENU  
1. Power-On System  
2. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot  
3. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
4. Read Service Processor Error Logs  
5. Read System POST Errors  
6. View System Environmental Conditions  
99. Exit from Menus  
1>  
Note: The service processor prompt reads either 1> or 2> to indicate which serial port  
on the system unit is being used to communicate with the service processor.  
v
v
Power-On System  
Allows the user to power-on the system.  
Read VPD Image from last System Boot  
Displays manufacturer vial product data, such as serial numbers, part numbers, and  
so on, that were stored from the system boot prior to the one in progress now.  
v
Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
Displays the boot progress indicators (checkpoints), up to a maximum of 100, from  
the system boot prior to the one in progress. This historical information can be useful  
to help diagnose system faults.  
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line are the  
progress indicators (latest) from the boot that produced the current sessions. Below  
the dashed line are progress indicators (oldest) from the boot preceding the one that  
produced the current sessions.  
The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest). The  
dashed line represents the point where the latest boot started.  
If the <-- arrow occurs, use the posted code.  
Read Service Processor Error Logs  
Displays the service processor error logs.  
v
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), also known as  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have additional information available  
and are able to time stamp the errors with local time. See page 68 for an example of  
the error log.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
Read System POST Errors  
Select this item to review the results of the POST (Power-On Self-Test). Your server  
may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there are sufficient working  
system resources. If POST errors occur during startup, this error log, when used with  
the diagnostics, helps to isolate faults. See page “System POST Errors” on page 69  
for an example of the POST error screen.  
View System Environmental Conditions  
With this menu option, the service processor reads all environmental sensors and  
reports the results to the user. This option can be useful when surveillance fails,  
because it allows the user to determine the environmental conditions that may be  
related to the failure. See page 50 for an example of the System Environmental  
Conditions screen.  
Privileged User Menus  
The following menus are available to privileged users only. The user must know the  
privileged access password, if set, to access these menus.  
Main Menu  
At the top of the Main Menu is a listing containing:  
v
v
v
Your Service Processor’s current firmware version  
The firmware copyright notice  
The System Name given to your server during setup (optional)  
You need the firmware version for reference when you either update or repair the  
functions of your service processor.  
The System Name, an optional field, is the name that your server reports in problem  
messages. This name helps your support team (for example, your system administrator,  
network administrator, or service representative) to more quickly identify the location,  
configuration, and history of your server. The System Name is set from the Main Menu  
using option 6.  
Note: The information under the Service Processor Firmware heading in the following  
Main Menu illustration is example information only.  
44 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Processor Firmware  
Firmware Level: sh991029  
Copyright 1997, IBM Corporation  
SYSTEM NAME  
MAIN MENU  
1. Service Processor Setup Menu  
2. System Power Control Menu  
3. System Information Menu  
4. Language Selection Menu  
5. Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
6. Set System Name  
99. Exit from Menus  
1>  
Service Processor Setup Menu  
The Service Processor Setup menu shown below is accessed from the Main Menu:  
SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU  
1. Change Privileged Access Password  
2. Change General-Access Password  
3. Enable/Disable Console Mirroring:  
Currently Disabled  
4. Start Talk Mode  
5. OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
6. Reset Service Processor  
7. Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM  
8. Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
1>  
Note: Unless otherwise stated in the menu responses, setings become effective when  
a menu is exited using option 98 or 99.  
Passwords  
Passwords can be any combination of up to eight alphanumeric characters. You can  
enter longer passwords, but the entries are truncated to include only the first eight  
characters. Passwords can be set from the service processor menu or from the System  
Management Services menus.  
For security purposes, the service processor counts the number of attempts to enter  
correct passwords. The results of not recognizing a correct password within this error  
threshold are different, depending on whether the attempts are being made locally (at  
the server) or remotely (through a modem). The error threshold is three attempts.  
If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords at the server, the  
service processor exits the menus. This action is taken based on the assumption that  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the server is in an adequately secure location with only authorized users having access.  
Such users must still successfully enter a login password to access AIX.  
If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords remotely, the service  
processor disconnects the modem to prevent potential security attacks on the server by  
unauthorized remote users.  
The following table illustrates what you can access with the Privileged Access Password  
and the General-Access Password.  
Privileged Access Password  
General Access Password  
Resulting Menu  
MAIN MENU displays  
MAIN MENU displays  
None  
None  
Set  
None  
Set  
None  
Users with password, see the  
MAIN MENU displays Other  
users, the GENERAL USER  
MENU displays  
Set  
Set  
Users see menus associated  
with the entered password  
v
v
v
Change Privileged Access Password  
Set or change the privileged access password. It provides the user with the capability  
to access all service processor functions. This password is usually used by the  
system administrator or root user.  
Change General-Access Password  
Set or change the general-access password. It provides limited access to service  
processor menus and is usually available to all users who are allowed to power on  
the server.  
Enable/Disable Console Mirroring  
When Console Mirroring is enabled, the service processor sends information to both  
serial ports. This capability, which can be enabled by local or remote users, provides  
local users with the capability to monitor remote sessions. Console mirroring can be  
enabled for the current session only. For more information, see “Console Mirroring”  
on page 67.  
v
v
Start Talk Mode  
In a console-mirroring session, it is useful for those who are monitoring the session  
to be able to communicate with each other. Selecting this menu item activates the  
keyboards and displays for such communications while console mirroring is  
established. This is a full duplex link, so message interference is possible. Alternating  
messages between users works best.  
OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
This menu can be used to set up operating system (OS) surveillance.  
46 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
1. Surveillance:  
Currently Enabled  
2. Surveillance Time Interval:  
Currently 5 or Not Applicable  
3. Surveillance Delay:  
Currently 10 or Not Applicable  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
v
v
v
Surveillance  
Can be set to Enabled or Disabled.  
Surveillance Time Interval  
Can be set to any number from 1 to 255 minutes.  
Surveillance Delay  
Can be set to any number from 0 to 255 minutes.  
Surveillance time interval and surveillance delay can only be changed after surveillance  
is enabled.  
Refer to “Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance” on page 65 for more  
information about surveillance.  
v
Reset Service Processor  
Allows the user to reinitialize the service processor.  
Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM  
This is an automatic process.  
v
Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu  
This menu can be used to setup Serial Port Snooping, in which the user can configure  
serial port 1 as a ″catch-all″ reset device.:  
From the main Service Processor menu, select option 1, Service Processor setup, then  
select option 8 (Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu).  
SERIAL PORT SNOOP SETUP MENU  
1. System reset string:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Snoop Serial Port:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
1>  
Use the system reset string option to enter the system reset string, which resets the  
machine when it is detected on the main console on Serial Port 1.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the Snoop Serial Port option to select the Serial Port to Snoop.  
Note: Only Serial Port 1 is supported.  
After Serial Port Snooping is correctly configured, at any point after the system unit is  
booted to AIX, whenever the reset string is typed on the main console, the system unit  
uses the Service Processor reboot policy to restart. This action causes an EPOW (Early  
Power Off Warning) to be logged, and also an AIX dump to be created if the machine is  
at an AIX prompt, with AIX in such a state that it can respond. If AIX cannot respond,  
the EPOW record is created, rather than the AIX dump.  
Pressing Enter after the reset string is not required, so make sure that the string is not  
common or trivial. A mixed-case string is recommended.  
System Power Control Menu  
The menu is used to set power control options.  
SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU  
1. Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
3. Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
4. Power-On System  
5. Power-Off System  
6. Enable/Disable Fast System Boot:  
Currently Disabled  
7. Boot Mode Menu  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
1>  
Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode  
Use this option to instruct the service processor to immediately power-on the server  
after a power failure, bypassing power-on password verification. Unattended Start Mode  
can also be set using SMS menus. Unattended Start Mode can be used on servers that  
require automatic power-on after a power failure.  
48 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BOOT MODE MENU  
1. Boot to SMS Menu:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Service Mode Boot from Saved List:  
Currently Disabled  
3. Service Mode Boot from Default List:  
Currently Disabled  
4. Boot to Open Firmware Prompt:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
1>  
Boot Mode Menu  
Allows users to configure the system to automatically start a specific function on the  
next system start. This configuration applies to the next boot only and is reset to the  
default state of being disabled following a successful boot attempt.  
v
Enabling the Boot to SMS Menu option  
Causes the system to automatically enter the System Management Services menu  
during the boot process. Enabling this option is equivalent to pressing 1 on the  
attached ASCII terminal (or F1 on a graphics terminal) while the system initialization  
indicators display on screen.  
v
Enabling the Service Mode Boot from Saved list option  
Causes the system to automatically enter the Stand-alone diagnostics (see  
“Standalone Diagnostic Operation” on page 112 for more on Stand-alone  
diagnostics). Enabling this option is equivalent to pressing 5 on the attached ASCII  
terminal (or F5 on a graphics terminal) while the system initialization indicators  
display on screen.  
v
v
Enabling the Service Mode Boot from Default List option  
Causes the system to automatically enter the Online Diagnostics in Service Mode  
(see “Online Diagnostics Modes” on page 109 for more Online Diagnostics). Enabling  
this option is equivalent to pressing ’6’ on the attached ASCII terminal (or F6 on a  
graphics terminal while the system initialization indicators display on screen.  
Enabling the Boot to Open Firmware Prompt option  
Causes the system to automatically enter Open Firmware prompt (also called the OK  
prompt). Enabling this option is equivalent to pressing 8 on the attached ASCII  
terminal (or F8 on a graphics terminal) while the system initialization indicators  
display on screen (see page 149 for more information about Open Firmware prompt).  
If more than one option is enabled, the system recognizes only the option  
corresponding to the smallest menu number. For example, If options 4 and 2 were  
enabled, the system recognizes only Option 2: Service Mode Boot from Saved List.  
After a boot attempt, all enabled options are disabled. In effect, the system throws  
away any menu options that are enabled after the option with the highest priority (the  
option with the smallest menu number) is executed.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The user can also override the choices in the Boot Mode Menu while the system  
initialization indicators display on the screen. For example, if the user had enabled  
the system to enter the SMS menus (option 1) but pressed the 8 key while the  
system initialization indicators displayed on the screen, the system would enter the  
Open Firmware prompt and disregards the settings in the Boot Mode Menu.  
After the logo displays, the initialization icons display across the bottom of the screen.  
v
Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
Ring Indicate Power-On is an alternate method of dialing in, without establishing a  
service processor session. If the system is powered off and Ring Indicate Power-On  
is enabled, the server is powered on at the predetermined number of rings, If the  
server is already on, no action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not  
answered. The caller receives no feedback that the server is powered on. The Ring  
Indicate Power-On Menu and defaults are shown below:  
Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
1. Ring indicate power-on:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Number of rings:  
Currently 6  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
The number of rings can be set to any number greater than zero.  
v
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu, see “Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu” on  
page 59.  
v
Power-On System  
Allows immediate power-on of the system. For other power-on methods, see “System  
Power-On Methods” on page 61.  
v
Power-Off System  
Allows the user to power-off the server following a surveillance failure.  
System Information Menu  
This menu provides access to system configuration information, error logs, system  
resources, and processor configuration.  
50 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU  
1. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
2. Read Service Processor Error Logs  
3. Read System POST Errors  
4. Read NVRAM  
5. Read Service Processor Configuration  
6. View System Environmental Conditions  
7. Processor configuration/deconfiguration Menu  
10. Enable/Disable CPU Guard Menu  
Currently Enable  
11. Enable/Disable MEM Guard  
Currently Enable  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
1>  
v
Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
Displays the boot progress indicators (checkpoints), up to a maximum of 100, from  
the system boot prior to the one in progress. This historical information can help to  
diagnose system faults.  
The progress indicators are displayed in two sections. Above the dashed line are the  
progress indicators (latest) from the boot that produced the current sessions. Below  
the dashed line are progress indicators (oldest) from the boot preceding the one that  
produced the current sessions.  
The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest). The  
dashed line represents the point where the latest boot started.  
v
v
Read Service Processor Error Logs  
Displays error conditions detected by the service processor.  
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), also known as  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have additional information available  
and are able to time stamp the errors with the local time. See page 68 for an  
example of the error log.  
Read System POST Errors  
Select this option to review the results of the POST (Power-On Self-Test). Your  
system unit may be able to start in the presence of POST errors if there is sufficient  
working system resources. If POST errors occur during start up, this error log, when  
used with the diagnostics, helps to isolate faults. See page “System POST Errors” on  
page 69 for an example of the POST error screen.  
v
v
v
Read NVRAM  
Displays nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) contents.  
Read Service Processor Configuration  
Displays current service processor configuration.  
View System Environmental Conditions  
The service processor reads all environmental sensors and reports the results to the  
user. Use this option when surveillance fails, because it allows the user to determine  
the environmental conditions that may be related to the failure.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following is an example of the System Environmental Conditions screen:  
System Environmental Conditions  
(System Power is currently off.)  
Fan 0: A stopped fan detected  
Fan 1: A stopped fan detected  
Fan 2: A stopped fan detected  
Fan 3: A stopped fan detected  
MEM Temperature is operating within normal tolerances  
I/O Temperature is operating within normal tolerances  
CPU Temperature is operating within normal tolerances  
5.0 Volts: A low 5.0 Voltage reading detected  
3.3 Volts: A low 3.3 Voltage reading detected  
5.0 Standby Volts: is operating within normal tolerance  
+12.0 Volts: A low +12.0 voltage reading detected  
-12.0 Volts: A high -12.0 voltage reading detected  
(Press Return to Continue)  
v
Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu  
Use this option to view and modify processor configuration.  
The following is an example of the Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu:  
Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu  
Processor number  
0. Configured by system (0x0)  
1. Configured by system (0x0)  
2. Configured by system (0x0)  
3. Configured by system (0x0)  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
To change the configuration, select the processor number  
1>  
The user can manually configure or deconfigure any processor, regardless of failure  
status, through this Service Processor menu. The configuration process takes place  
during the system power-up. Therefore, the configuration displayed in STANDBY  
mode reflects the configuration during the last boot.  
To view the current configuration, access the Service Processor menu after the  
system starts. When the user selects a processor, its state toggles between  
configured and deconfigured. Processors that are not present are not listed. A  
processor can be in any of the following four states:  
–
Configured by system: The processor is present, and has not exceeded the  
number of failure threshold. It is configured by the system and is available.  
–
Deconfigured by system: The processor is present, but has exceeded the  
number of failure threshold. It is deconfigured by the system and is currently  
unavailable.  
–
–
Manually configured: The processor is present and available. It is configured by  
the user through the service processor menus.  
Manually deconfigured: The processor is present, but unavailable. It has been  
deconfigured by the user through the service processor menus.  
52 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
The following is an example of the Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu:  
Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu  
DIMMs on memory card number 0:  
DIMMs on memory card number 1:  
1. Configured by system (0x0)  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
Enter card number _and_ DIMM number separated by a space  
1>  
The user can manually configure or deconfigure any memory DIMM,(Dual Inline  
Memory Module) regardless of failure status, through this Service Processor menu.  
The configuration process takes place during the system power-up. Therefore, the  
configuration displayed in STANDBY mode reflects the configuration during the last  
boot.  
To view the current configuration, access the Service Processor menu after the  
system starts. When the user selects a memory DIMM, its state will toggle between  
configured and deconfigured. Memory DIMMs that are not present are not listed. A  
memory DIMM can be in any of the following four states:  
–
Configured by system: The memory DIMM is present, and has not exceeded the  
number of failure threshold. It is configured by the system and is available.  
–
Deconfigured by system: The memory DIMM is present, but has exceeded the  
number of failure threshold. It is deconfigured by the system and is currently  
unavailable.  
–
–
Manually configured: The memory DIMM is present and available. It is  
configured by the user through the service processor menus.  
Manually deconfigured: The memory DIMM is present, but unavailable. It has  
been deconfigured by the user through the service processor menus.  
Language Selection Menu  
The service processor menus and messages are available in different languages. This  
menu allows selecting languages into which service processor and system firmware  
menus and messages are displayed.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU  
1. English  
2. France  
3. Deutsch  
4. Italian  
5. Espanol  
6. Svenska  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
1>  
Note: Your ASCII terminal must support the ISO-8859 character set to correctly display  
languages other than English.  
Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
This menu is used to configure a modem for the service processor to use to support the  
system.  
CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU  
1. Modem Configuration Menu  
2. Serial Port Selection Menu  
3. Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
4. Telephone Number Setup Menu  
5. Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
6. Customer Account Setup Menu  
7. Call-Out Test  
8. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
1>  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Modem Configuration Menu, see “Modem Configuration Menu”.  
Serial Port Selection Menu, see “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page 55.  
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu, see “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page 55.  
Telephone Number Setup Menu, see “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on page 56.  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu, see “Call-Out Policy Setup Menu” on page 57.  
Customer Account Setup Menu, see “Customer Account Setup Menu” on page 58.  
Call-out Test, see “Call-Out Policy Setup Menu” on page 57.  
Ring Indicate Power-On Menu, see 50.  
Modem Configuration Menu  
Two entries at the top of the Modem Configuration Menu display the status of the  
current selections. Selections are made in the two sections labeled Modem Ports and  
Modem Configuration File Name. Select the serial port that you want to activate and  
then select the modem configuration file for the modem on the port. To set up both  
serial ports with modems, make your selections one port at a time.  
54 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information on choosing a modem configuration file, see “Sample Modem  
Configuration Files” on page 171 and “Transfer of a Modem Session” on page 175.  
Modem Configuration Menu  
Port 1 Modem Configuration File Name:  
Port 2 Modem Configuration File Name:  
To make changes, First select the port and then the configuration file  
name  
Modem Ports:  
1. Serial port 1  
2. Serial port 2  
Modem Configuration File Name:  
3. none  
4. modem_f_sp  
5. modem_f0_sp  
6. modem_f1_sp  
7. modem_z_sp  
8. modem_z0_sp  
9. modem_m0_sp  
10. modem_m1_sp  
30. Save configuration to NVRAM and Configure modem  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
Serial Port Selection Menu  
This menu allows you to enable and/or disable the call-in functions of each serial port in  
any combination.  
Serial Port Selection Menu  
1. Serial Port 1 Call-Out:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Serial Port 2 Call-Out:  
Currently Disabled  
3. Serial Port 1 Call-In:  
Currently Disabled  
4. Serial Port 2 Call-In:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
This menu allows you to set Serial port speed to enhance terminal performance or to  
accommodate modem capabilities.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
1. Serial port 1 speed:  
Currently 9600  
2. Serial port 2 speed:  
Currently 9600  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
A speed of 9600 baud or higher is recommended. Valid serial port speeds are shown  
below:  
50  
600  
4800  
75  
1200  
2000  
2400  
2400  
3600  
7200  
110  
134  
150  
300  
9600  
19200  
57600  
115200  
Telephone Number Setup Menu  
Use the menu to set or change the telephone numbers for reporting a system failure.  
Telephone Number Setup Menu  
1. Service Center Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Customer Administration Center Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
3. Digital Pager Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
4. Customer Voice Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
5. Customer System Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
1>  
v
v
Service Center Telephone Number is the number of the service center computer.  
The service center usually includes a computer that takes calls from servers with  
call-out capability. This computer is referred to as the catcher. The catcher expects  
messages in a specific format to which the service processor conforms. Contact your  
service provider for the correct service center telephone number to enter here. For  
more information about the format and catcher computers, refer to the README file  
in the AIX /usr/samples/syscatch directory.  
Customer Administration Center Telephone Number is the number of the System  
Administration Center computer (catcher) that receives problem calls from servers.  
Contact your system administrator for the correct telephone number to enter here.  
56 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
Digital Pager Telephone Number is the number for a pager carried by someone  
who responds to problem calls from your server. Contact your administration center  
representative for the correct telephone number to enter here. For test purposes, use  
a test number, which you can change later.  
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging  
function. Although they can be used for paging, they return an error message  
when they do not get the expected response from another modem. Therefore,  
even though the paging was successful, the error message causes the service  
processor to retry, continuing to place pager calls for the number of retries  
specified in the Call-Out policy Setup Menu. These retries result in redundant  
pages.  
For digital pagers that require a personal identification number (PIN) for access,  
include the PIN in this field as shown in the following example:  
18001234567,,,,87654  
The commas create pauses for the voice response system, and the 87654  
represents the PIN. The length of these pauses is set in modem register S8. The  
default is usually 1 or 2 seconds each.  
v
v
Customer Voice Telephone Number is the telephone number of a phone near the  
server or answered by someone responsible for the server. This is the telephone  
number left on the pager for callback. For test purposes, use a test number, which  
you can change later.  
Customer System Telephone Number is the telephone number to which your  
server’s modem is connected. The service or administration center representatives  
need this number to make direct contact with your server for problem investigation.  
This is also referred to as the call-in phone number.  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
This menu allows you to set call-out policy.  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
1. Call-Out policy (First/All):  
Currently First  
2. Remote timeout, (in seconds):  
Currently 120  
3. Remote latency, (in seconds):  
Currently 2  
4. Number of retries:  
Currently 2  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
1>  
v
Call-Out Test  
The Call-Out Test verifies if the Call-Out function is working properly. Before the Test,  
call-out must be enabled and the system configured properly for call-out.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
During the setup, the user should have entered the phone numbers for the Digital  
Pager and Customer Voice for test purposes. These numbers are used to determine  
whether call-out is working during the Call-Out Test.  
The Call-Out Test should cause the user’s phone to ring. If the test is successful,  
call-out is working properly. The user should now change the test Digital pager and  
Customers Voice number to the correct numbers.  
Call-Out policy can be set to first or all. If call-out policy is set to first, the service  
processor stops at the first successful call out to one of the following numbers in the  
order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administration Center  
3. Pager  
If call-out policy is set to all, the service processor attempts a call out to the following  
numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administration Center  
3. Pager  
v
v
Remote timeout and Remote latency are functions of your service provider’s  
catcher computer. Either use the defaults or contact your service provider for  
arecommended settings.  
Number of retries is the number of times you want the server to retry calls that  
resulted in busy signals or in other error messages.  
Customer Account Setup Menu  
This menu allows users to enter information that is specific to their account.  
Customer Account Setup Menu  
1. Customer account number:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Customer RETAIN login userid:  
Currently Unassigned  
3. Customer RETAIN login password:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
1>  
v
v
Customer account number is assigned by your service provider for record-keeping  
and billing. If you have an account number, enter it. Otherwise, leave this field blank.  
Customer RETAIN login userid and Customer RETAIN login password apply to a  
service function to which your service provider may or may not have access. Leave  
these fields blank if your service provider does not use RETAIN.  
58 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up from scratch, for example,  
from a system reset or power-on. The boot process ends when control passes to the  
operating system process.  
Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware  
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
1. Number of reboot attempts:  
Currently 3  
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy?  
Currently Yes  
3. Enable supplemental restart policy?  
Currently No  
4. Call-Out before restart:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
1>  
v
v
Number of reboot attempts If the server fails to successfully complete the boot  
process, it attempts to reboot the number of times specified. Entry values equal to or  
greater than 0 are valid. Only successive failed reboot attempts count, not reboots  
that occur after a restart attempt. At restart, the counter is set to 0.  
Use OS-Defined restart policy lets the service processor react or not react the  
same as the operating system to major system faults, by reading the setting of the  
operating system parameter Automatically Restart/Reboot After a System Crash.  
This parameter may or may not be defined, depending on the operating system or its  
version and level. If the operating system automatic restart setting is defined, then it  
can be set to respond to a major fault by restarting or by not restarting. See your  
operating system documentation for details on setting up operating system automatic  
restarts. The default value is Yes.  
v
Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is No. If set to Yes, the  
service processor restarts the system when the system loses control as detected by  
the service processor surveillance, and either:  
v
v
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to No. OR  
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to Yes, and the operating system has NO  
automatic restart policy.  
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page 63.  
v
Call-Out before restart If a restart is necessary due to a system fault, you can  
enable the service processor to call out and report the event. This option can be  
valuable if the number of these events becomes excessive, signalling a bigger  
problem.  
The following table describes the relationship among the operating system and service  
processor restart controls:  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OS Automatic  
Service processor to Service Processor  
System response  
reboot/restart after  
crash setting  
use OS-Defined  
restart policy?  
Enable supplemental  
restart policy?  
None  
None  
None  
None  
False2  
False2  
False2  
False2  
True  
No  
No1  
Yes  
No1  
Yes  
No1  
Yes  
No1  
Yes  
No1  
Yes  
No1  
Yes  
No  
Restarts  
Restarts  
Restarts  
Yes1  
Yes1  
No  
No  
Yes1  
Yes1  
No  
True  
No  
Restarts  
Restarts  
Restarts  
True  
Yes1  
Yes1  
True  
1
Service Processor default  
2 AIX default  
Service Processor Functions  
This section provides detailed information about the service processor functions.  
The 44P Series Model 170 supports the functions listed in the following table:  
Built-in Functions  
Initialization and Test  
Error Data Collection  
Service Processor  
Basic Instructions Test (BIST)  
JTAG System Chip Initialization  
BIST/POST errors and status  
Checkstop FIR data logout  
Machine check logout  
Configuration  
CPU Complex validation  
VPD Collection  
System Management  
Reset and Reboot on System  
Firmware fail  
Reboot on system failure  
60 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Local User Function  
User Interface  
Local async console  
Text based menus with NLS  
Operator Panel messages  
Power On/Off  
Power and Miscellaneous  
Status and Data Access  
Configurable Reboot Policy  
VPD  
Error data (Service Processor)  
Error data (system)  
Environmental data  
Passwords  
Service Processor Setup Utilities  
Phone numbers  
Language (NLS) selection  
Call In/Call Out enable/disable  
Flash (Gold/Recovery block) Update  
Flash (Composite block) Update  
System Name  
Modem Configuration  
Boot failure  
Remote User Functions  
Call Out (Call Home) Reporting  
OS Termination  
Surveillance failure  
Critical EPOW reporting  
Checkstop  
Machine check  
Identify system by name  
Call In  
Power-on via ring-indicate  
Password/security check  
Console mirroring/Quick disconnect  
System Power-On Methods  
This section discusses the following system power-on methods:  
v
v
Power-on Switch  
Remote Power-on via Ring-Indicate Signal  
The server automatically powers on when it detects a ″ring indicate″ signal from a  
modem attached to one of the integrated serial ports.  
A remote user can call the server to activate ring detection by the modem. Listen for  
a few more rings than the threshold number for starting the system and then hang  
up. The default threshold is one ring.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wait 5 minutes for the server to initialize and then call again using an ASCII terminal.  
The server responds by requesting a password, if set, or presenting the service  
processor menus. The remote user now has control of the server.  
Note: For security, if the system is powered on by the remote power-on via ring  
indicate signal and the service processor detects an operator panel battery  
failure, the service processor causes the system to power off. See “Service  
Processor Call-In Security” for more information.  
v
v
Unattended start mode - refer to Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode on page  
48.  
The Service Processor can be enabled to recover from the loss of ac power (see  
Enable/Disable Unattended Power-On Mode in the SYSTEM POWER CONTROL  
MENU). When ac power is restored, the system returns to the then current power  
state at the time ac loss occurred. For example, if the system was powered-on when  
ac loss occurred, it reboots/restarts when power is restored. If the system was  
powered-off when ac loss occurred, it remains off when power is restored.  
Timed power-on - refer to the shutdown -t command on servers using AIX.  
Working in conjunction with AIX, the Service Processor in your server can operate a  
timer, much like the wake-up timer on your clock radio. You can set the timer so that  
your server powers on at a certain time after shutting down. The timer is battery  
operated, so power interruptions occurring while the server is off do not affect its  
accuracy. Refer to the AIX shutdown -t command for details on setting the timer.  
Note: If an ac power loss is in progress when the Timed Power-On attempt occurs,  
the server is not able to power on when ac power is restored.  
v
v
Follow-up to a Failed Boot Attempt  
The service processor initiates a power-on sequence if a failed boot attempt is  
detected (due to a hardware or software failure).  
Fast/Slow Boot (IPL) Capabilities  
Using the operator-panel functions, you can select the IPL type, mode, and speed of  
your boot capabilities. For more information, refer to operator panel functions 01 and  
02.  
Attention: Selecting fast IPL results in several diagnostic tests being skipped.  
Service Processor Call-In Security  
If the service processor detects bad battery-powered storage (indicating that the battery  
in the operator panel has failed or is disconnected), it maintains server security by  
disabling the call-in capability to both serial ports.  
When call-in is disabled, the system can still be powered on by using the ring-indicator  
signal, but the service processor then causes the system to power down, preventing  
access to any system facilities or to AIX.  
After battery power is restored, the password(s) must be reset and the call-in function(s)  
enabled. Both of these operations can be performed from Service Processor menus.  
See “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page 55.  
62 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery  
Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up; for example, from a system  
reset or power-on. The boot process ends when control passes to the operating system  
process.  
Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware is  
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.  
Boot (IPL) Speed  
When the server enters reboot recovery, slow IPL is automatically started, which gives  
the POST an opportunity to locate and report any problems that may otherwise be  
untested.  
Failure During Boot Process  
During the boot process, either initially after system power-on or upon reboot after a  
system failure, the Service Processor monitors the boot progress. If progress stops, the  
Service Processor can reinitiate the boot process (reboot) if enabled to do so. The  
Service Processor can re-attempt this process according to the number of retries  
selected in the Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu.  
Failure During Normal System Operation  
When the boot process completes and control transfers to the operating system (OS),  
the service processor can monitor operating system activity (see the Set Surveillance  
Parameters option in the SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU). If OS activity stops  
due to a hardware-or software-induced failure, the service processor can initiate a  
reboot/restart process based on the settings in the Service Processor Reboot/Restart  
Policy Setup Menu and the OS automatic restart settings (see the operating system  
documentation).  
If you are using the AIX operating system, the menu item under SMIT for setting the  
restart policy is Automatically Reboot After Crash (True/False). The default is False.  
When the setting is True, and if the service processor parameter ″Use OS-Defined  
Restart Policy″ is Yes (the default), Service Processor takes over for AIX to  
reboot/restart after a hardware or surveillance failure.  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls  
The operating system’s automatic restart policy (see operating system documentation)  
indicates the operating system response to a system crash. The service processor can  
be instructed to refer to that policy by the Use OS-Defined Restart Policy setup menu.  
Processor Boot-Time Deconfiguration (CPU Repeat-Gard)  
Processor boot time deconfiguration allows for the removal of processors from the  
system configuration at boot time. The objective is to minimize system failure or data  
integrity exposure due to a faulty processor.  
This function uses processor hardware Built-In Self-Test (BIST) and firmware Power-On  
Self-Test (POST) to discover and isolate processor hardware failures during boot time.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
It also uses the hardware error detection logic in the processor to capture run-time  
recoverable and irrecoverable error indications. The firmware uses the error signatures  
in the hardware to analyze and isolate the error to a specific processor.  
The processors that are deconfigured remain off-line for subsequent reboots until the  
faulty processor hardware is replaced.  
This function allows usersto manually deconfigure or re-enable a previously  
deconfigured processor through the Service Processor menu. The user can also enable  
or disable this function through the Service Processor.  
Processor Run-Time Deconfiguration (CPU-Gard)  
Processor run-time deconfiguration allows for the dynamic removal of CPUs from the  
system configuration. The objective is to minimize system failures or data integrity  
exposures due to a faulty processor. The processor to be removed is the one that has  
experienced repeated run-time recoverable internal errors (over a predefined threshold).  
The function uses the hardware error detection logic in the processor to capture  
run-time recoverable error indications. The firmware uses the error signatures in the  
hardware to analyze and isolate the error to a specific CPU. The firmware also  
maintains error-threshold information.  
When an internal recoverable error for a processor reaches a predefined threshold, the  
firmware notifies the AIX operating system. The AIX operating system migrates all  
software processes and interrupts to another processor and puts the faulty processor in  
stop state.  
CPUs that are deconfigured at run time remain off-line for subsequent reboots through  
the CPU Boot Time Deconfiguration function, until the faulty CPU hardware is replaced.  
The user can also enable or disable this function via the AIX system management  
function.  
Memory Boot-Time Deconfiguration (Memory Repeat-Gard)  
Memory boot time deconfiguration allows for the removal of a memory segment or  
DIMM from the system configuration at boot time. The objective is to minimize system  
failures or data integrity exposure due to faulty memory hardware. The hardware  
resource(s) to be removed are the ones that experienced the following failures:  
v
v
v
A boot-time test failure.  
Run-time recoverable errors over threshold prior to the current boot phase.  
Run-time irrecoverable errors prior to the current boot phase.  
This function uses firmware Power-On Self-Test (POST) to discover and isolate memory  
hardware failures during boot time. It also uses the hardware error detection logic in the  
memory controller to capture run-time recoverable and irrecoverable error indications.  
The firmware uses the error signatures in the hardware to analyze and isolate the error  
to the specific memory segment or DIMM.  
64 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The memory segment or DIMM that is deconfigured remains off-line for subsequent  
reboots until the faulty memory hardware is replaced.  
The function allows users to manually deconfigure or re-enable a previously  
deconfigured memory segment/DIMM through the Service Processor menu. The user  
can also enable or disable this function through the Service Processor menu.  
Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance  
Surveillance is a function in which the service processor monitors the system, and the  
system monitors the service processor. This monitoring is accomplished by periodic  
samplings called heartbeats  
Surveillance is available during two phases:  
v
v
System firmware bring-up (automatic)  
Operating system run time (optional)  
System Firmware Surveillance  
System firmware surveillance provides the service processor with a means to detect  
boot failures while the system firmware is running.  
System firmware surveillance is automatically enabled during system power-on. It  
cannot be disabled by the user.  
If the service processor detects no heartbeats during system boot (for 7 minutes), it  
cycles the system power to attempt a reboot. The maximum number of retries is set  
from the service processor menus. If the fail condition repeats, the service processor  
leaves the machine powered on, logs an error, and displays menus to the user. If  
Call-out is enabled, the service processor calls to report the failure and displays the  
operating-system surveillance failure code on the operator panel.  
Operating System Surveillance  
The operating system surveillance provides the service processor with a means to  
detect hang conditions, as well as hardware or software failures, while the operating  
system is running. It also provides the operating system with a means to detect service  
processor failure caused by the lack of a return heartbeat.  
Operating system surveillance is enabled by default, allowing the user to run operating  
systems that do not support this service processor option.  
You can also use Service Processor Menus and Service Processor Service Aid to  
enable or disable operating system surveillance.  
For operating system surveillance to work correctly, you must set the following  
parameters:  
v
v
Surveillance enable/disable  
Surveillance interval  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This is the maximum time (in minutes) the service processor should wait for a  
heartbeat from the operating system before timeout.  
v
Surveillance delay  
This is the length of time (in minutes) for the service processor to wait from when the  
operating system is started to when the first heartbeat is expected.  
Surveillance takes effect immediately after the parameters are set from the service  
processor menus.  
If operating system surveillance is enabled (and system firmware has passed control to  
the operating system), and the service processor does not detect any heartbeats from  
the operating system, the service processor assumes the system is hung. The machine  
is left powered on and the service processor enters standby phase, displaying the  
operating system surveillance failure code on the operator panel. If Call-out is enabled,  
the service processor calls to report the failure.  
Call Out  
The service processor can call out when it detects one of the following conditions:  
v
v
v
v
System firmware surveillance failure  
Operating system surveillance failure (if supported by the operating system)  
Critical environmental failures  
Restarts  
To enable the call-out feature, do the following:  
1. Have a modem connected to serial port 1 or 2  
2. Set up the following using the service processor Menus or Diagnostic Service Aids:  
v
v
v
v
Enable call out for the serial port where the modem is connected.  
Set up serial port line speed.  
Enter the modem configuration filename.  
Set up site-specific parameters (such as phone numbers for call out and call out  
policy).  
v
To call out before restart, set Call-Out before restart to ENABLED from the  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup menu.  
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging function.  
Although they can be used for paging, they return an error message when they  
do not get the expected response from another modem. Therefore, even though  
the paging was successful, the error message causes the service processor to  
retry, continuing to place pager calls for the number of retries specified in the  
Call-Out policy Setup Menu. These retries result in redundant pages.  
66 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Console Mirroring  
Console mirroring allows a user on a local ASCII terminal to monitor the service  
processor activities of a remote user. Console mirroring ends when the service  
processor releases control of the serial ports to the system firmware.  
Using this option the user can set the modem connection, remote sessions, and  
console mirroring.  
v
v
v
service processor  
Modem connected to one serial port and enabled for incoming calls  
Local ASCII terminal connected to the other serial port. This local terminal can be  
connected directly to your server or connected through another modem.  
Remote console mirroring can be invoked in three ways:  
1. Remote session first, then local session added  
2. Remote session already in progress.  
3. Remote user uses the service processor menus to enable console mirroring,  
allowing both consoles to be active.  
Local console mirroring can be invoked in three ways:  
1. Local session first, then remote session added  
2. Local session is already in progress.  
3. The service processor receives a call from the remote user.  
4. The local user selects the option to enable console mirroring. The service processor  
immediately begins mirroring service processor menus.  
Note: To disconnect quickly, press Ctrl+D on either console, and both sessions will exit  
the service processor menus.  
Service Processor Firmware Updates  
Attention: Only the service processor firmware can be updated from the service  
processor menus; the system firmware cannot be updated from the service processor  
menus. A service processor firmware update always requires a companion system  
firmware update which must be applied first. For this reason, updating only the service  
processor firmware using the service processor menus is not recommended. Go to the  
RS/6000 support web site at http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro to download the  
latest firmware levels and update instructions.  
The service processor firmware update image must be written onto a DOS- formatted  
diskette. The update image can be obtained from the RS/6000 support web site:  
http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro.  
After the update diskette has been made, from the service processor main menu, select  
″Service Processor Setup″. Then select ″Reprogram Service Processor Flash EPROM″.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The program requests the update diskette(s) as they are needed. The service  
processor will automatically reboot after the firmware update is complete.  
Service Processor Error Log  
The service processor error logs contain error conditions detected by the service  
processor.  
Error Log  
19991118165344 1. 4B276851 CPU BIST fail detected  
FRUs to replace: P1-C1  
Press "C" to clear error log, any other key to continue.  
>
The time stamp in this error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), also known as  
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more information available and are  
able to time stamp with local time.  
68 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System POST Errors  
If POST (Power-On Self-Test) errors occur during startup, this error log helps isolate  
faults when used with the diagnostics.  
Read System POST Errors  
Version : 0  
Severity : 0  
Disposition : 0  
Initiator : 0  
Event being reported : 0  
Extended Error Log Data:  
0xC2 0x00 0x84 0x09 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00  
0x20 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x72 0x74  
0x63 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00  
0x00 0x00 0x28 0x03 0x00 0x05 0x00 0x01  
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00  
0x49 0x42 0x4D 0x00 0x55 0x30 0x2E 0x31  
0x2D 0x50 0x31 0x2D 0x58 0x31 0x00  
(Press Return to Continue)  
Service Processor Operational Phases  
This section provides a high-level flow of the phases of the service processor.  
SP Power Applied  
Pre-Standby Phase  
Standby Phase SP Menus Available  
Bring-Up Phase SMS Menus Available  
Runtime Phase AIX Login Prompt Available  
Pre-Standby Phase  
This phase is entered when the server is connected to a power source. The server may  
or may not be fully powered on. This phase is exited when the Power-On Self-Tests  
(POST) and configuration tasks are completed.  
The Pre-Standby phase components are:  
v
Service Processor Initialization - Performs any necessary hardware and software  
initializations.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
Service Processor POST - Conducts Power-On Self-Tests on its various work and  
code areas.  
Service Processor Unattended Start Mode Checks - To assist fault recovery. If  
unattended start mode is set, the service processor automatically reboots the server.  
The service processor does not wait for user input or power-on command, but moves  
through the phase and into the Bring-up Phase. Access SMS menus or &sp menus  
to reset the unattended start mode.  
Standby Phase  
The standby phase can be reached in either of two ways:  
v
With the server off and power connected (the normal path), recognized by OK in the  
LCD display. OR  
v
With the server on after an operating system fault, recognized by STBY or an 8-digit  
code in the LCD display.  
In the Standby phase, the service processor takes care of some automatic duties and is  
available for menu operation. The service processor remains in the standby phase until  
a power-on request is detected.  
The Standby phase components are as follows:  
v
Modem Configuration  
The service processor configures the modem (if installed) so that incoming calls can  
be received or outgoing calls can be placed.  
v
Dial In  
Monitor incoming phone line to answer calls, prompt for a password, verify the  
password, and remotely display the standby menu. The remote session can be  
mirrored on the local ASCII console if the server is so equipped and the user enables  
this function.  
v
Menus  
The service processor menus are password-protected. Before you can access them,  
you need either the General User (General Access Password or GAP) or Privileged  
User (Privileged Access Password or PAP).  
Bring-Up Phase  
This phase is entered upon power-on, and exited upon loading of the operating system.  
The Bring-Up phase components are:  
v
v
Retry Request Check  
The service processor checks to see if the previous boot attempt failed. If two  
consecutive failures are detected, the service processor displays an error code and  
places an outgoing call to notify an external party if the user has enabled this option.  
Dial Out  
The service processor can dial a preprogrammed telephone number in the event of  
an IPL failure. The service processor issues an error report with the last reported IPL  
status indicated and any other available error information.  
70 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
Update Operator Panel  
The service processor displays Operator Panel data on the ASCII terminal if a  
remote connection is active.  
v
v
Environmental Monitoring  
The Service Processor provides expanded error recording and reporting.  
System Firmware Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)  
The service processor monitors and times the interval between system firmware  
heartbeats.  
v
Responding to System Processor Commands  
The service processor responds to any command issued by the system processor.  
Run-time Phase  
This phase includes the tasks that the service processor performs during steady-state  
execution of the operating system.  
v
Environmental Monitoring  
The Service Processor monitors voltages, temperatures, and fan speeds (on some  
servers).  
v
v
Responding to System Processor Commands  
The service processor responds to any command issued by the system processor.  
Run-Time Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)  
If the device driver is installed and surveillance enabled, the service processor  
monitors the system heartbeat. If the heartbeat times out, the service processor  
places an outgoing call. This is different from the Bring-up Phase scenario where two  
reboot attempts are made before placing an outgoing call.  
Service Processor Procedures in Service Mode  
When the system is in service mode, the following service processor parameters are  
suspended:  
v
v
v
v
Unattended Start Mode  
Reboot/Restart Policy  
Call-Out  
Surveillance  
When service mode is exited, the service processor parameters revert to the customer  
settings.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
72 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services  
Use the System Management Services menus to view information about your computer  
and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing device configurations.  
If you have chosen a graphical display as your system console, you can use the  
graphical System Management Services described below. If you are using an ASCII  
display as your system console, see “Text-Based System Management Services” on  
page 94.  
Graphical System Management Services  
To start the Graphical System Management Services, turn on or restart the computer.  
The firmware version installed in your system unit is displayed at the bottom right  
corner of the initial logo screen. Note the version number; processor upgrades may  
require a specified version of firmware to be installed in your system unit. (Update  
System Firmware is an option under the Utilities menu in the System Management  
Services.)  
After the logo is displayed, initialization icons display across the bottom of the screen.  
To enter the Graphical System Management Services, you must press the F1 key after  
the keyboard icon displays during startup and before the tone.  
If you have pressed the F1 key, the System Management Services menu displays after  
the initialization and power-on self-test (POST) are complete.  
Note: If you have installed a privileged-access password, you are prompted for this  
password before you gain access to the System Management Services menu.  
After the System Management Services starts, the following screen displays.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management Services  
Config  
Multiboot  
Utilities  
Exit  
You can also press F8 here to enter the open firmware OK> prompt.  
The System Management Services screen contains the following choices.  
Config: Enables you to view your system setup. Go to  
“Config” on page 75.  
Multiboot: Enables you to set and view the default  
operating system, modify the boot sequence, access the  
Open Firmware command prompt, and work with other  
options. Go to “Multiboot” on page 76.  
74 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utilities: Enables you to set and remove passwords,  
enable the unattended start mode, set and view the  
addresses of your system’s SCSI controllers, select the  
active console, view or clear the firmware error log, and  
update your system unit’s firmware program. Go to  
“Utilities” on page 79.  
Exit: Returns you to the previous screen.  
To select an icon, move the cursor with the arrow keys to choose which icon is  
highlighted, then press the Enter key. You can also select an icon by clicking on it with  
your left mouse button. To leave the current screen, either press the Esc key or select  
the Exit icon.  
Config  
By selecting this icon, you can view information about the setup of your system unit. A  
list similar to the following displays when you select the Config icon.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Name  
PowerPC, POWER3 375 MHz  
L2-Cache, 4096K  
PowerPC, POWER3 375 MHz  
L2-Cache, 4096K  
Memory  
Memory Card slot 1, Module Slot =1 size=128MB  
Memory Card slot 1, Module Slot =2 size=128MB  
Service Processor  
Tablet Port  
LPT  
addr=378  
Com  
addr=3F8  
Com  
addr=2F8  
Audio  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Diskette  
addr=3F0  
Integrated Ethenet  
addr=9999FF111R  
SCSI controller id= 7  
If more than one screen of information is available, a blue arrow displays in the top right  
corner of the screen. Use the Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll through the  
pages.  
Multiboot  
The options available from this screen allow you to view and set various options  
regarding the operating system and boot devices.  
76 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OK  
OK prompt  
Select  
Software  
Software  
Default  
Install  
From  
Boot  
Device  
Multiboot Startup  
EXIT  
The following describes the choices available on this  
screen.  
Select Software: This option, if supported by the  
operating system, allows you to choose which operating  
system to use. Choosing an operating system causes the  
system to start. This option is supported by AIX. However,  
not all operating systems support this option.  
If you receive an informational message saying that no  
operating system is installed, then the system information  
in nonvolatile storage may have been lost. This situation  
can occur if the battery has been removed. To correct this  
situation, refer to the bootlist reference in your AIX  
operating system documentation.  
Software Default: This option, if supported by the  
operating system, enables you to select a default  
operating system for your system unit.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Install From: Enables you to select a media drive from  
which to install an operating system. Selection of a device  
is done using the spacebar.  
Boot Sequence: Enables you to view and change the  
custom boot list (the sequence in which devices are  
searched for operating system code). You may choose  
from 1 to 5 devices for the custom boot list.  
The default boot sequence is:  
1. Primary diskette drive  
2. CD-ROM drive  
3. Tape drive  
4. Hard disk drive  
5. Network device  
To change the custom boot list, enter a new order in the  
New column, then click on the Save icon. The list of boot  
devices is updated to reflect the new order.  
Attention: To change the custom boot list back to the  
default values, click on Default. If you change your startup  
sequence, you must be extremely careful when performing  
write operations (for example, copying, saving, or  
formatting). You can accidentally overwrite data or  
programs if you select the wrong drive.  
OK Prompt: Enables you to go directly to the Open  
Firmware command prompt. The Open Firmware  
command prompt is used for debugging and device driver  
development. For more information about the operation of  
the Open Firmware command prompt, refer to IEEE  
Standard 1275.  
OK  
Note: This is for debugging and device development  
only. Do not envoke this feature if you are not familiar with  
Open Firmware. To exit from the command prompt, restart  
your system.  
Multiboot Startup: Clicking on this button toggles  
whether the Multiboot menu displays automatically at  
startup.  
78 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Utilities  
Selecting this icon enables you to perform various tasks and view additional information  
about your system unit.  
Spin Delay  
Password  
SCSI id  
Update  
Select  
Console  
ErrorLog  
RIPL  
Exit  
The following describes the choices available on this screen.  
Password: Enables you to set password protection for  
turning on the system unit and for using system  
administration tools. Go to “Password” on page 80.  
Spin Delay: Enables you to change the spin-up delay for  
SCSI hard disk drives attached to your system. Go to  
“Spin Delay” on page 85.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Log: Enables you to view and clear the firmware  
error log information for your system unit. Go to “ErrorLog”  
on page 85.  
RIPL (Remote Initial Program Load): Enables you to  
select a remote system from which to load programs  
through a network adapter when your system unit is first  
turned on. This option also allows you to configure  
network adapters that are required for RIPL. Go to “RIPL”  
on page 86.  
SCSI ID: Allows you to view and change the addresses  
(IDs) of the SCSI controllers attached to your system unit.  
Go to “SCSI ID” on page 91.  
Firmware Update: Allows you to update the system  
firmware program. Go to “Firmware Update” on page 92.  
Select Console:Allows the user to select which console  
the user would like to use to display the SMS Menus. This  
selection is only for the SMS Menus and doesnot affect  
the display used by the AIX operating system.  
Follow the instructions that display on the screen, select  
the console from the screen. Press F1 the system will  
start the boot to AIX. Go to “Select Console” on page 104.  
Password  
80 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select this icon to perform password-related tasks.  
Power-On Access  
Remove  
Set  
Remote <Off>  
Privileged Access  
Remove  
Set  
Exit  
Power-On Password  
Setting a Power-On Access password helps protect  
information stored in your system unit. If a Power-On  
Access password is set for your system unit, the  
Power-On Access status icon is shown in the locked  
position. If a Power-On Access password is not set, then  
the Power-On Access status icon is shown in the unlocked  
position (as shown in the screen above).  
When you select the Set icon, a screen with eight empty  
boxes displays. Type your password in these boxes. You  
can use any combination of up to eight characters (A–Z,  
a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character,  
a key displays in the box.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ent e r Pa s s wor d  
Press Enter when you are finished; you must type the password again for verification.  
Ve r i f y Pa s s wor d  
If the two password entries do not match, an error icon displays with a message:  
Password was attempted to be set and an error code Power-On Access: 20E00000  
displays.  
Note: If you forget the Power-On Access password, you can erase the password by  
shutting down the system unit and removing the battery for at least 30 seconds.  
A password becomes effective only after the system is turned off and back on again.  
Remote Mode: The remote mode, when enabled, allows the system to start from the  
defined boot device. This mode is ideal for network servers and other system units that  
operate unattended. When the remote mode is set, the icon label changes to Remote  
<On>.  
82 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: To use the remote mode feature for booting unattended devices, you must  
enable the unattended start mode. See the “System Power Control Menu” on  
page 48 for instructions on enabling the unattended start mode, which allows the  
system unit to turn on whenever ac power is applied to the system (instead of  
having the system unit wait for the power button to be pushed).  
Privileged-Access Password  
The privileged-access password protects against the unauthorized starting of the  
system programs. Select the Set icon to set and verify the privileged-access password.  
When you select the Set icon, a screen with 8 empty boxes displays. Type your  
password in these boxes. You can use any combination of up to eight characters (A–Z,  
a–z, and 0–9) for your password. As you type a character, a key displays in the box.  
Ent e r Pa s s wor d  
Press Enter when you are finished; you must type the password again for verification.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ve r i f y Pa s s wor d  
If you type the password incorrectly, press the Esc key and start again.  
If the two password entries do not match, an error icon displays with a message:  
Password was attempted to be set and an error code Privileged Access: 20E00001  
displays.  
If you previously had set a privileged-access password and want to remove it, select  
the Remove icon.  
After you have selected the remove icon. The privileged-access status icon flashes and  
changes to the unlock position to indicate that the privileged-access not set.  
Note: After you have entered and verified the password, the privileged-access  
password icon flashes and changes to the locked position to indicate that your  
system unit now requires the password that you just entered before running  
system programs.  
Attention: If no user-defined bootlist exists and the privileged-access password has  
been enabled, you are asked for the privileged-access password at startup every time  
you boot your system.  
84 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spin Delay  
Select this icon to change the spin-up delay for SCSI hard disk drives attached to your  
system. Spin-up delay values can be entered manually or you can use a default setting.  
All values are measured in seconds. The default is two seconds. After you have entered  
the new Spin-up delay values, use the arrow keys to highlight the Save icon and press  
Enter.  
<Hard Disk Spinup Delay>  
Current Spin Up Value - 2  
Enter New Value (>1)  
(SEC)  
Default  
Save  
Exit  
ErrorLog  
Selecting this icon displays the log of errors that your system unit has encountered  
during operations.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Error Log  
Date  
Time  
Error Code  
Location  
1. 96/01/29 00:51:32 12345678 00000000  
2. No entry  
Clear  
Exit  
Selecting the Clear icon erases the entries in this log.  
This error log only shows the first and last errors.  
RIPL  
Selecting the Remote Initial Program Load (RIPL) icon gives you access to the  
following selections.  
86 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ping  
Config  
Set Address  
Exit  
Set Address  
The Set Address icon allows you to define addresses from which your system unit can  
receive RIPL code.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote IPL Setup  
Client Addr  
Server Addr  
000.000.000.000  
000.000.000.000  
000.000.000.000  
255.255.255.000  
Gateway Addr  
Subnet Mask  
Save  
Exit  
If any of the addresses is incomplete or contains a number other than 0 to 255, an error  
message displays when you select the Save icon. To clear this error, correct the  
address and select Save again.  
Attention: If the client system and the server are on the same subnet, set the  
gateway IP address to [0.0.0.0].  
To change an address, press the backspace key on the highlighted address until the  
old address is completely deleted. Then enter the new address.  
Ping  
The Ping icon allows you to confirm that a specified address is valid by sending a test  
transmission to that address.  
88 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ping Setup  
Client Addr  
Server Addr  
000.000.000.000  
000.000.000.000  
000.000.000.000  
255.255.255.000  
Gateway Addr  
Subnet Mask  
Exit  
Adapter  
To change an address, press the backspace key on the highlighted address until the  
old address is completely deleted. Then enter the new address.  
Selecting the Ping icon displays a screen in which you select the communications  
(token-Ring or Ethernet) to be used to send test transmissions.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<Ping>  
Token Ring, slot #=4  
ethernet, (Integrated)  
Ping  
Exit  
To use this screen, do the following:  
1. Use the arrow keys or mouse to highlight an adapter to configure.  
2. Press the spacebar to select the adapter.  
3. Highlight the Ping icon and press Enter to send the test transmission.  
Config  
The Config icon allows you to configure network adapters which require setup.  
Selecting the Config icon causes a list of the adapters requiring configuration to  
display.  
To use this screen, do the following:  
1. Use the arrow keys or mouse to highlight an adapter to configure.  
2. Press the spacebar to select the adapter.  
3. Highlight the OK icon and press Enter.  
90 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
<Configuration>  
ethernet, slot #=3  
ethernet, (Integrated)  
Exi t  
OK  
SCSI ID  
Select this icon to view and change the addresses (IDs) of the SCSI controllers  
attached to your system unit. To change a SCSI controller ID, highlight the entry by  
moving the up or down arrow keys, then use the spacebar to scroll through available  
IDs. After you have entered the new address, use the left or right arrow keys or mouse  
to highlight the Save icon and press Enter.  
At any time in this process, you can select the Default icon to change the SCSI IDs to  
the default value of 7.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Change SCSI ID  
Id  
Type  
Slot  
Max Id  
15  
0
0
Ultra  
7
7
Fast/Wide  
15  
Save  
Default  
Exit  
Firmware Update  
Select this icon to update the system or service processor firmware in your system unit  
from an image on a 3.5 inch diskette.  
To update system and service processor firmware, use the Diagnostics Service Aid  
under AIX. To obtain firmware updates, as well as update instructions, see the following  
Web address: http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro  
If you are not able to obtain firmware updates or instructions from this Web address,  
contact your service representative for assistance.  
92 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Only use the Firmware Update utility described here if instructed by an authorized  
representative, or by instructions from the Web address listed above, or during the  
recovery of damaged firmware.  
When you are prompted, insert the firmware update diskette containing the new  
firmware image.  
Attention: While the new firmware image is being copied into your system unit, you  
must not turn off the system unit. Turning off the system unit during the update process  
may render your system unit inoperable.  
After the firmware update is complete, shut down and restart the system unit.  
If the firmware update does not complete successfully or the system unit does not  
restart after the firmware update, contact your authorized reseller or marketing  
representative.  
Firmware Recovery  
If a troubleshooting procedure has indicated that the system firmware unit has been  
damaged, it may be possible to recover it. For example, if the system hangs during  
startup with E1EA displayed on the operator panel, the system firmware has been  
damaged but may be recovered.  
To recover a damaged system firmware, do the following:  
1. Create a firmware recovery diskette. This must be a 3.5″ high-density (1.44 MB)  
diskette that has been formatted for DOS.  
2. Obtain the system firmware update image file from one of the following sources:  
a. From the Web address: http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro  
b. From an service representative if you cannot access the Web address.  
3. Copy the system firmware update image file to the recovery diskette, naming it  
PRECOVER.IMG. The file must be written in DOS format.  
4. When the system stops booting, for example at E1EA, insert the recovery diskette. If  
the diskette drive LED does not light up, power the system unit off, then back on  
again.  
5. If the recovery procedure is successful, the system will continue starting up and  
display checkpoints of the form E1XX.  
6. Enter the System Management Service menu. When the keyboard indicator  
displays, press the 1 key if the system console is an ASCII terminal. If the system  
console is a graphics display and directly attached keyboard, press the F1 key.  
7. When the main menu displays, choose Utilities, then perform a firmware update of  
the system firmware as described on page “Firmware Update” on page 92.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Text-Based System Management Services  
The text-based Open Firmware command line and System Management Services are  
available if an ASCII terminal is attached to your system unit. The text-based Open  
Firmware command line allows you to configure some adapters, and the System  
Management Services makes it possible for you to view information about your system  
unit and to perform such tasks as setting passwords and changing device  
configurations.  
To start the text-based System Management Services instead of the Open Firmware  
command line, press the number 1 key on the ASCII terminal keyboard when the  
keyboard text symbol displays during startup. After the text-based System Management  
Services starts, the following screen displays.  
Note: The version of firmware currently installed in your system unit is displayed at the  
top of each screen in the text-based System Management Services. Note the  
version number. Processor and other device upgrades may require the specified  
version of firmware to be installed in your system unit. Update System Firmware  
is an option under the Utilities menu.  
System Management Services  
1
2
3
4
Display Configuration  
Multiboot  
Utilities  
Select Language  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
After you have finished using the text-based System Management Services, type x (for  
exit) to start your system unit.The x takes you back to the prior screen.  
Display Configuration  
This option provides information about the setup of your system unit. A screen similar to  
the following is displayed.  
94 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Name  
Power PC, POWER3 375 MHz  
L2-Cache 4096K  
Power PC, POWER3 375 MHz  
L2-Cache 4096K  
Memory  
Memory card slot=1, module slot=1 size=128MB  
Memory card slot=1, module slot=2 size=128MB  
Service Processor  
Tablet Port  
LPT  
addr=378  
COM  
addr=3F8  
COM  
addr=2F8  
Audio  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
Diskette Drive  
addr=3F0  
SCSI controller id=7  
.-----------. .-----------.  
|P=prev-page| |N=next-page|  
′-----------' ′-----------'  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
Multiboot Menu  
Use this screen to view and set various options regarding the operating system and  
boot sequence.  
Multiboot Menu  
1 Select Software  
2 Software Default  
3 Select Install Device  
4 Select Boot Device  
5 OK Prompt  
6 Multiboot Startup  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
Select Software: If this option is supported by the operating system, shows the name  
of the operating system installed. This option may not be supported by all operating  
systems.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If you are running on AIX and you receive the following message:  
No Operating System Installed  
this indicates that information in nonvolatile storage could have been lost, as would  
happen if the battery had been removed. To re-create this value, run the bootlist  
command under AIX with the appropriate parameters as to the location of the operating  
system in a particular hard disk. See the bootlist command in your AIX documentation.  
Software Default: If supported by the operating system, lets you select the default  
operating system to start the system. This option may not be supported by all operating  
systems.  
Select Install Device: Produces a list of devices, for example the CD-ROM, from which  
the operating system is installed. Select a device and the system searches the device  
for an operating system to install and if supported by the operating system in that  
device, the name of the operating system displays.  
Boot Device: Provides a list of devices that can be selected to be stored on the boot  
list. Up to five devices are supported.  
OK Prompt: Provides access to the Open Firmware command prompt.  
Multiboot Startup: Toggles between OFF and ON and selects whether the Multiboot  
menu invokes automatically on startup.  
Select Boot Device  
Select this option to view and change the custom boot list, which is the sequence of  
devices read at startup time.  
Select Boot Devices  
1 Display Current Settings  
2 Restore Default Settings  
3 Configure 1st Boot Device  
4 Configure 2nd Boot Device  
5 Configure 3rd Boot Device  
6 Configure 4th Boot Device  
7 Configure 5th Boot Device  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
Display Current Settings: Lists the current order of devices in the boot list. The  
following screen shows an example of this display.  
96 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Current Boot Device  
1. Diskette  
2. Ethernet (Integrated)  
3. SCSI CD-ROM  
4. SCSI 4.5 GB Hard Disk id=6  
5. SCSI 4.5 GB Hard Disk id=5  
id=3  
(slot=1)  
(slot=1)  
(slot=5)  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
Restore Default Settings: Restores the boot list to the default device of:  
1. Primary diskette drive  
2. CD-ROM drive  
3. Tape drive  
4. Hard disk drive  
5. Network device.  
Attention: To change the custom boot list back to the default values, select the  
Default. If you change your startup sequence, you must be extremely careful when  
performing write operations (for example, copying, saving, or formatting). You can  
accidentally overwrite data or programs if you select the wrong drive.  
Configure Nth Boot Device  
In the description below, Nth can be 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc. depending on your choice on  
the previous menu.  
Options display a screen similar to the following:  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configure Nth Boot Device  
Device  
Number  
Current  
Position  
Device  
Name  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
-
Diskette  
Ethernet  
SCSI CD-ROM  
SCSI 4.5GB Hard Disk  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
Type the device number of the device name that you want to select as the Nth boot  
device. For example, if you entered this menu by selecting 4 on the previous menu  
(configure 2nd Boot Device), then enter the number 3 based on the list shown above.  
You are thus selecting the SCSI CD-ROM device to be the 2nd (Nth) device in the boot  
sequence.  
Utilities  
The Utilities screen enables you to select from the following system management tools.  
Utilities  
1 Set Passwords and Unattended Start Mode  
2 SCSI Spin up  
3 Display Error Log  
4 Remote Initial Program Load Setup  
5 Change SCSI id  
6 Update System Firmware  
7 Update Service Processor Firmware  
8 Select Console  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
Set Password and Unattended Start Mode  
Entering this selection permits access to the following options.  
98 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Password Utilities  
1 Set Power-On Access Password  
2 Remove Power-On Access Password  
3 Unattended Start Mode <OFF>  
4 Set Privileged-Access Password  
5 Remove Privileged-Access Password  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
Set Power-On Access Password  
Setting a Power-On Access password helps protect information stored in your computer.  
You can use any combination of up to eight characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9) for your  
password. The password you type is not displayed on the screen. Press Enter when  
you are finished; you must type the password again for verification. Passwords are not  
case-sensitive upon entry.  
If you previously had set a Power-On Access password and want to remove it, select  
Remove Power-On Access Password.  
Note: If you forget the Power-On Access password, the battery must be removed for  
longer than 30 seconds to reset the NVRAM. The system unit power cable must  
be disconnected before removing the battery.  
A password becomes effective only after the system is turned off and back on again.  
Unattended Start Mode:  
Note: Unlike other systems, unattended start mode is not automatically disabled when  
the Power-On Access password is removed.  
Set Privileged-Access Password  
The privileged-access password protects against the unauthorized starting of the  
system programs.  
Attention: If the privileged-access password has been enabled, you are asked for the  
privileged-access password at startup every time you boot your system.  
If you previously had set a privileged-access password and want to remove it, select  
Remove Privileged-Access Password.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Spin Up  
Selecting this utility allows you to adjust the hard disk spin-up delay in your system unit.  
Display Error Log  
Use this option to view or clear your system unit’s error log. A screen similar to the  
following displays when you select this option.  
.----------------------------------------------------------.  
|
|
|
|
|
Error Log  
|
|
Date  
Time  
12:13:22  
Entry 2. no error logged  
Error Code  
25A80011  
Location |  
Entry 1. 01/04/96  
00-00  
|
|
′----------------------------------------------------------'  
.-----------------.  
|C=Clear Error Log|  
′-----------------'  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
Note: The time stamp in his error log is Coordinated Universal Time (CUT), which is  
also referred to as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). AIX error logs have more  
information available and can time stamp with your local time.  
Remote Initial Program Load Setup  
This option allows you to enable and set up the remote startup capability of your  
system unit. You must first specify the network parameters.  
Network Parameters  
1. IP Parameters  
2. Adapter Parameters  
3. Ping  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
Selecting the IP (Internet Protocol) Parameters option displays the following screen.  
100 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Parameters  
1. Client IP Address  
2. Server IP Address  
3. Gateway IP Address  
4. Subnet Mask  
[000.000.000.000]  
[000.000.000.000]  
[000.000.000.000]  
[255.255.255.000]  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
To change IP Parameters, type the number of the parameters for which you want to  
change the value.  
Attention: If the client system and the server are on the same subnet, set the  
gateway IP address to [0.0.0.0].  
Selecting the Adapter Parameters option allows you to view an adapter’s hardware  
address, as well as configure network adapters that require setup. A screen similar to  
the following displays.  
Device  
Slot  
Hardware Address  
1. ethernet  
2. token-ring  
3. ethernet  
3
5
0004AC5E08D2  
0020357A0530  
0004ACE4020B  
Integrated  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
(Press enter after making selection)  
===>  
Selecting an adapter on this screen displays configuration menus for that adapter:  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10/10c ethernet TP PCI Adapter  
1. Data Rate  
2. Full Duplex  
[Auto]  
[Auto]  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
Selecting the Data Rate option allows you the change the media employed by the  
Ethernet adapter:  
.----------------.  
| DATA RATE  
| 1. 10 Mbps  
| 2. 100 Mbps  
| 3. Auto  
|
|
|
|
′----------------'  
===>  
Selecting the Full Duplex option allows you to change how the Ethernet adapter  
communicates with the network:  
.----------------.  
| Full Duplex  
| 1. Yes  
| 2. No  
|
|
|
|
| 3. Auto  
′----------------'  
===>  
Select Ping, from the Network Parameters Menu, to test a connection to a remote  
system unit. After selecting the Ping Option, you must choose which adapter  
communicates with the remote system.  
102 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device  
Slot  
Hardware Address  
1. ethernet  
2. token-ring  
3. ethernet Integrated  
3
5
0004AC5E08D2  
0020357A0530  
0004ACE4020B  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
(Press enter after making selection)  
===>  
After choosing which adapter to use to ping the remote system, you must provide the  
addresses needed to communicate with the remote system.  
Ping IP Address  
1. Client IP Address  
2. Server IP Address  
3. Gateway IP Address  
4. Subnet Mask  
[129.132.4.20]  
[129.132.4.10]  
[129.132.4.30]  
[255.255.255.0]  
.---------.  
|E=Execute|  
′---------'  
.------.  
|X=Exit|  
′------'  
===>  
Change SCSI ID  
This option allow you to view and change the addresses of the SCSI controllers  
attached to your system unit.  
Update System or Service Processor Firmware  
These options allow you to update your system or service processor firmware from an  
image on a 3.5 inch diskette. Note that you must insert a diskette containing the  
firmware update image after you see a confirmation screen.  
To update system and service processor firmware, use Diagnostics Service Aid under  
AIX. To obtain firmware updates, as well as update instructions, see the following Web  
address: http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro.  
If you are not able to obtain firmware updates or instructions from this Web address,  
contact your Service representative for assistance.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Only use the Firmware Update utility described here if instructed by an authorized  
representative or by instructions from the Web address posted above, or during the  
recovery of damaged firmware.  
When you are prompted, insert the firmware update diskette containing the new  
firmware image.  
.--------------------------------------------------------------.  
| This selection will update your system firmware. Do you want |  
| to continue? Press Y(Yes) N(No).  
′--------------------------------------------------------------'  
|
Attention: While the new firmware image is being copied into your system unit, do not  
turn off the system unit. Turning off the system unit during the update process can  
render your system unit inoperable.  
After the firmware update is complete, shut down and restart the system unit.  
If the firmware update does not complete successfully or the system unit does not  
restart after the firmware update, contact your authorized reseller or marketing  
representative.  
Firmware Recovery  
For instructions on firmware recovery, go to “Firmware Recovery” on page 93.  
Select Console  
The Select Console Utility allows the user to select which console the user would like to  
use to display the SMS Menus. This selection is only for the SMS Menus and does not  
affect the display used by the AIX operating system.  
Follow the instructions that display on the screen, select the console from the screen.  
Press 1 and the system will start the boot to AIX.  
Select Language  
This option allows you to change the language used by the text-based System  
Management Services screens.  
104 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SELECT LANGUAGE  
1. English  
2. Francais  
3. Deutsch  
4. Italiano  
5. Espanol  
6. Svenska  
====>  
.------.  
|x=Exit|  
′------'  
Open Firmware  
To enter the Open Firmware command line, press the number 8 key after the keyboard  
text symbol displays during startup. If you have pressed the number 8 key, the Open  
Firmware command line (an OK prompt) displays after the initialization and power-on  
self tests (POST) are complete. The Open Firmware command line can be used to set  
up adapters that are not configurable with the System Management Services. Your  
adapter documentation directs you to use this option if it is needed.  
Note: Your TTY must support the ISO-8859 character set to properly display languages  
other than English.  
To enter the Open Firmware command line, you must press the F8 key after the  
keyboard icon displays during startup.  
If you have pressed the F8 key, the Open Firmware command line (an OK prompt)  
displays after the initialization and power-on self test (POST) are complete.  
Note: If you have installed a privileged-access password, you are prompted for this  
password before you gain access to the Open Firmware command line.  
The Open Firmware command line can be used to set up adapters that are not  
configurable with the System Management Services. Your adapter documentation  
directs you to use this option if it is needed.  
Chapter 4. System Management Services 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
106 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics  
The diagnostics consist of Standalone Diagnostics and Online Diagnostics. Standalone  
Diagnostics are packaged on removable media and must be booted before they can be  
run. If booted, they have no access to the AIX error log or the AIX configuration data.  
Online Diagnostics, when installed, reside with AIX on the disk or server. They can be  
run in any of the following ways:  
v
v
v
Booted in single user mode (called service mode)  
Run in maintenance mode (called maintenance mode)  
Concurrently (called concurrent mode) with other applications.  
The online diagnostics have access to the AIX error log and the AIX configuration data.  
Standalone and Online Diagnostics Operating Considerations  
Consider the following before using the diagnostics:  
v
Run Online Diagnostics in Service Mode when possible, unless otherwise directed.  
The Online Diagnostics perform additional functions, compared to Standalone  
Diagnostics. This ensures that the error state of the system is captured in NVRAM  
for your use in fixing the problem. The AIX error log and certain SMIT functions are  
only available when diagnostics are run from the disk drive.  
v
v
When you run Online Diagnostics, device support for some devices might not have  
been installed. If this is the case, that device does not appear in the resource list.  
When you run Standalone Diagnostics, device support for some devices might be  
contained on supplemental diagnostic media. If this is the case, the device does not  
appear in the resource list when running diagnostics unless the supplemental media  
has been processed.  
v
Support for some TTY terminals is optionally installed. If you attach a TTY terminal to  
a system to run diagnostics, it might not work correctly because the AIX support for  
the terminal may not be installed.  
Selecting a Console Display  
When you run Standalone Diagnostics (and under some conditions Online Diagnostics),  
you must select the console display. The diagnostics display instructions on any  
graphics display and the terminal attached to the S1 serial port.  
Identifying the Terminal Type to the Diagnostics Programs  
Note: This is a different function from selecting a console display.  
When you run diagnostics, you must identify what type of terminal you are using. If the  
terminal type is not known when the FUNCTION SELECTION menu is displayed, the  
diagnostics do not allow you to continue until a terminal is selected from the DEFINE  
TERMINAL option menu. Select lft for adapter-attached displays.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Undefined Terminal Types  
If you specify an undefined terminal type from the DEFINE TERMINAL option menu, the  
menu prompts you to enter a valid terminal type. The menu redisplays until either a  
valid type is entered or the user exits the DEFINE TERMINAL option.  
Resetting the Terminal  
If you enter a terminal type that is valid (according to the DEFINE TERMINAL option  
menu) but is not the correct type for the ASCII terminal being used, you may be unable  
to read the screen, use the function keys, or use the Enter key. Bypass these difficulties  
by pressing Ctrl-C to reset the terminal. The screen display which results from this  
resetting action depends on the mode in which the system is being run:  
v
v
Online Normal or Maintenance Mode - The command prompt displays.  
Standalone Mode or Online Service Mode - The terminal type is reset to dumb, the  
Diagnostic Operating Instruction panel displays, and you are required to go through  
the DEFINE TERMINAL process again.  
Running Standalone Diagnostics  
Consider the following when you run Standalone Diagnostics:  
v
The diagnostic disc must remain in the CD-ROM drive for the entire time that the  
diagnostics are running.  
v
The diagnostic disc cannot be ejected from the CD-ROM drive after the diagnostic  
programs have loaded. The disc can only be ejected after the system has been  
turned off and then turned on (Standalone mode) or after the diagnostics program  
has terminated (Online concurrent mode). The disc must be ejected before the  
system attempts to load the diagnostic programs again.  
v
v
The CD-ROM drive from which diagnostics were loaded cannot be tested.  
The SCSI adapter (or circuitry) controlling the CD-ROM drive from which diagnostics  
were loaded cannot be tested.  
Running Online Diagnostics  
Consider the following when you run the Online Diagnostics from a server or a disk:  
v
The diagnostics cannot be loaded and run from a disk until the AIX operating system  
has been installed and configured. After the AIX operating system has been installed,  
all three modes of operation are available.  
v
The diagnostics cannot be loaded on a system (client) from a server if that system is  
not set up to IPL from a server over a network, or the server has not been set up to  
send a service mode IPL of the diagnostics. When the system is set up to IPL from a  
server, the diagnostics are run in the same manner as they are from disk.  
v
If the diagnostics were loaded from disk or a server, you must shut down the AIX  
operating system before turning off the system unit to prevent possible damage to  
disk data. This is done in one of two ways:  
–
If the diagnostic programs were loaded in Stand-Alone mode, press the F3 key  
until DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS displays. Then follow the  
displayed instructions to shut down the AIX operating system.  
–
If the diagnostic programs were loaded in maintenance or concurrent mode, enter  
the shutdown -F command.  
108 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
Under some conditions the system may stop, with instructions displayed on attached  
displays and terminals. Follow the instructions to select a console display.  
Running Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal  
Consider the following when you run diagnostics using a TTY-type terminal as the  
console display:  
v
See the operator manual for your type of TTY terminal to find the key sequences you  
need to respond to the diagnostics. For the 3151, refer to the 3151 ASCII Display  
Station Guide to Operations, form number GA18-2633. For the 3164, refer to the  
3164 ASCII Color Display Station Description, form number GA18-2617.  
v
When the diagnostics present display information through the S1 port, certain  
attributes are used. These attributes are set as if the diagnostics were using a 3161  
display terminal. Refer to the tables in “Appendix D. General Attributes Required  
When Using a TTY Terminal” on page 167 for a list of attributes for the 3161 ASCII  
Display Terminal and for two other ASCII display terminals commonly used with the  
system.  
v
If you have a TTY terminal other than a 3151, 3161, or 3164 attached to the S1 port,  
your terminal may have different names for the attributes. Refer to the tables in  
“Appendix D. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY Terminal” on page 167.  
Use the attribute descriptions listed there to determine the settings for your terminal.  
Online Diagnostics Modes  
The Online diagnostics can be run in three modes:  
v
v
Service Mode allows checking of most system resources.  
Concurrent Mode allows the normal system functions to continue while selected  
resources are being checked.  
v
Maintenance Mode allows checking of most system resources.  
Service Mode  
Service mode provides the most complete checkout of the system resources. This  
mode also requires that no other programs be running on the system. All system  
resources except the SCSI adapter and the disk drives used for paging can be tested.  
However, note that system memory and the processor are only tested during POST.  
Error log analysis is done in service mode when you select the Problem Determination  
option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
To run Online diagnostics in service mode, use the following steps:  
1. Stop all programs, including the AIX operating system.  
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROM discs.  
3. Turn off the system unit’s power.  
4. Turn on the system unit’s power.  
5. After the first POST indicator displays on the system unit’s console, press F6 on  
the directly attached keyboard or 6 on the TTY keyboard to indicate that  
diagnostics are to be loaded.  
Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The term POST indicator refers to the Icons (graphic display) or device  
mnemonics (ASCII terminal) that are displayed while the POST is  
executing.  
6. Enter any requested password.  
7. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
8. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
appear on the console display.  
9. Follow the displayed instructions to check out the desired resources.  
10. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.  
11. Press the F3 key (from a defined terminal) or press 99 (for an undefined terminal)  
to shut down the diagnostics before turning off the system unit.  
Note: Pressing the F3 key (from a defined terminal) produces a Confirm Exit menu  
containing two options:  
v
Continue with the shutdown by pressing F3.  
Return to diagnostics by pressing Enter.  
v
For undefined terminals, pressing 99 produces a menu containing two options:  
v
v
Continue with the shutdown by pressing 99, then Enter  
Return to diagnostics by pressing Enter.  
Concurrent Mode  
Concurrent mode provides a way to run Online diagnostics on some of the system  
resources while the system is running normal activity.  
Because the system is running in normal operation, some of the resources cannot be  
tested. The following resources cannot be tested in concurrent mode:  
v
v
v
v
v
SCSI adapters connected to paging devices  
Disk drive used for paging  
Any graphics-related device if running X, CDE, or windowing environment.  
Memory  
Processor  
Three levels of testing are available in concurrent mode:  
v
v
v
The share-test level tests a resource while the resource is being shared by  
programs running in the normal operation. This testing is mostly limited to normal  
commands that test for the presence of a device or adapter.  
The sub-test level tests a portion of a resource while the remaining part of the  
resource is being used in normal operation. For example, this test could test one port  
of a multiport device while the other ports are being used in normal operation.  
The full-test level requires the device not be assigned to or used by any other  
operation. This level of testing on a disk drive might require the use of the varyoff  
command. The diagnostics display menus allow you to vary off the needed resource.  
110 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error-log analysis is done in concurrent mode when you select theProblem  
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
To run the Online diagnostics in concurrent mode, you must be logged in to the AIX  
operating system and have the appropriate proper authority to issue the commands.  
The diag command loads the diagnostic controller and displays the Online diagnostic  
menus.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Concurrent Mode  
To run Online diagnostics in concurrent mode, use the following steps:  
1. Log in to the AIX operating system as root user.  
2. Enter the diag command.  
3. When the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS displays, follow the  
instructions to check out the desired resources.  
4. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. Then press the F3 key again to return to the AIX  
operating system prompt. Be sure to vary on any resource you had varied to off.  
5. Press the Ctrl-D key sequence to log off from root user.  
Maintenance Mode  
Maintenance mode runs the Online diagnostics using the customer’s version of the AIX  
operating system. This mode requires that all activity on the AIX operating system be  
stopped so the Online diagnostics have most of the resources available to check. All of  
the system resources except the SCSI adapters, memory, processor, and the disk drive  
used for paging can be checked.  
Error-log analysis is done in maintenance mode when you select the Problem  
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
The shutdown -m command is used to stop all activity on the AIX operating system  
and put the AIX operating system into maintenance mode. The diag command is used  
to invoke the diagnostic controller so you can run the diagnostics. After the diagnostic  
controller is then loaded, follow the normal diagnostic instructions.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Maintenance Mode  
To run the Online diagnostics in maintenance mode, you must be logged in to the  
customer’s version of the AIX operating system as root user and use the shutdown -m  
and diag commands. Use the following steps to run the Online diagnostics in  
maintenance mode:  
1. Stop all programs except the AIX operating system.  
2. Log in to the AIX operating system as root user.  
3. Enter the shutdown -m command.  
4. When a message indicates system is in single-user mode, enter the diag command.  
Note: It may be necessary to set TERM type again.  
Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and Online Diagnostics 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. When DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS is displayed, follow the  
displayed instructions to check out the desired resources.  
6. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING  
INSTRUCTIONS. Then press the F3 key again to return to the AIX operating  
system prompt.  
7. Press Ctrl-D to log off from root user.  
Standalone Diagnostic Operation  
Standalone Diagnostics provide a method to test the system when the Online  
Diagnostics are not installed and as a method of testing the disk drives and other  
resources that cannot be tested by the Online Diagnostics.  
No Error Log Analysis is done by the Stand-Alone Diagnostics.  
If running from CD-ROM, the CD-ROM drive and the SCSI controller that controls it  
cannot be tested by the Standalone Diagnostics.  
Running the Standalone Diagnostics  
To run Standalone Diagnostics in service mode, use the following steps:  
1. Stop all programs, including the AIX operating system.  
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROMs.  
3. Turn off the system unit’s power.  
4. Set the key mode switch to the service position.  
5. Turn on the system unit’s power.  
6. Insert the diagnostic media drive.  
7. When the keyboard POST indicator displays, press the F5 key on the directly  
attached keyboard, or the number 5 key on the TTY keyboard.  
8. Enter any requested passwords.  
9. Follow any instruction to select the console.  
10. After the diagnostic controller loads, DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
appear on the console display.  
11. Follow the displayed instructions to check out the desired resources.  
12. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.  
112 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids  
The AIX Diagnostic Package contains programs that are called Tasks. Tasks can be  
thought of as performing a specific function on a resource; for example, running  
diagnostics or performing a service aid on a resource. This chapter describes the tasks  
available in AIX Diagnostics Version 4.2 and later.  
Note: Many of these programs work on all system model architectures. Some  
programs are only accessible from online diagnostics in service or concurrent  
mode, while others may be accessible only from Standalone Diagnostics. Still  
other programs may only be supported on a particular system architecture, such  
as CHRP (Common Hardware Reference Platform), or RSPC (PowerPC  
Reference Platform). The 7044 Model 170 is a CHRP architecture system.  
Use the FUNCTION SELECTION menu to perform tasks.  
After a task is selected, a resource menu may be presented showing all resources  
supported by the task.  
You can use a fast path method to perform a task by using the diag command and the  
-T flag. The fast-path tasks are as follows:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
Certify – certifies media  
Chkspares – checks for the availability of spare sectors  
Download – downloads microcode to an adapter or device  
Disp_mcode – displays current level of microcode  
Format – formats media  
Identify – identifies the PCI RAID physical disks  
To run these tasks directly from the command line, specify the resource and other  
task-unique flags. Use the descriptions in this chapter to understand which flags are  
needed for a given task.  
Tasks  
The following tasks are described in this chapter:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Add Resource to Resource List  
AIX Shell Prompt  
Analyze Adapter Internal Log  
Backup and Restore Media  
Certify Media  
Change Hardware Vital Product Data  
Configure Dials and LPFKeys  
Configure ISA Adapters  
Configure Reboot Policy  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On Policy  
Configure Service Processor  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Configure Surveillance Policy  
Create Customized Configuration Diskette  
Delete Resource from Resource List  
Disk Maintenance  
Display Configuration and Resource List  
Display Firmware Device Node Information  
Display Hardware Error Report  
Display Hardware Vital Product Data  
Display Machine Check Error Log  
Display Microcode Level  
Display or Change Bootlist  
Display or Change Diagnostic Run Time Options  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results  
Display Resource Attributes  
Display Service Hints  
Display Software Product Data  
Display System Environmental Sensors  
Display Test Patterns  
Download Microcode  
Fibre Channel RAID Service Aids  
Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware  
Format Media  
Generic Microcode Download  
Local Area Network Analyzer  
Log Repair Action  
Periodic Diagnostics  
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify  
Process Supplemental Media  
Run Diagnostics  
Run Error Log Analysis  
Run Exercisers  
Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies  
Save or Restore Service Processor Configuration  
SCSI Bus Analyzer  
SCSI Device Identification and Removal  
SCSD Tape Drive Service Aid  
Spare Sector Availability  
SSA Service Aid  
Update Disk Based Diagnostics  
Update System or Service Processor Flash  
Update System Flash  
7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aids  
7318 Serial Communication Network Server  
Add Resource to Resource List  
Use this task to add resources back to the resource list.  
114 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and deleted  
from the Diagnostic Test List are listed. If no resources are available to be  
added, then none are listed.  
AIX Shell Prompt  
Note: Use this Service Aid in Online Service Mode only.  
This service aid allows access to the AIX command line. To use this service aid, the  
user must know the root password (when a root password has been established).  
Note: Do not use this task to install code or to change the configuration of the system.  
This task is intended to view files, configuration records, and data. Using this  
service aid to change the system configuration or install code might result in  
unexplained system problems after exiting the diagnostics.  
Analyze Adapter Internal Log  
The PCI RAID adapter has an internal log that logs information about the adapter and  
the disk drives attached to the adapter. Whenever data is logged in the internal log, the  
device driver copies the entries to the AIX system error log and clears the internal log.  
The Analyze Adapter Internal Log service aid analyzes these entries in the AIX system  
error log. The service aid displays the errors and the associated service actions. Entries  
that do not require any service actions are ignored.  
Backup and Restore Media  
This service aid allows verification of backup media and devices. It presents a menu of  
tape and diskette devices available for testing and prompts for selecting the desired  
device. It then presents a menu of available backup formats and prompts for the  
desired format. The supported formats are tar, backup, and cpio. After the device and  
format are selected, the service aid backs up a known file to the selected device,  
restores that file to /tmp, and compares the original file to the restored file. The restored  
file remains in /tmp to allow for visual comparison. All errors are reported.  
Certify Media  
This task allows the selection of diskette or hardfiles to be certified.  
Hardfiles can be connected either to a SCSI adapter (non-RAID) or a PCI SCSI RAID  
adapter. The usage and criteria for a hardfile connected to a non-RAID SCSI adapter  
are different from those for a hardfile connected to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter.  
v
Certify Diskette  
This selection enables you to verify the data written on a diskette. You can select the  
type of diskette being verified. The program then reads all of the ID and data fields  
on the diskette one time and displays the total number of bad sectors found.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
Certify Hardfile Attached to a Non-RAID SCSI Adapter  
This selection reads all of the ID and data fields. It checks for bad data and counts  
all errors encountered. If the unrecovered data errors exceed the threshold value, the  
hardfile needs to be formatted and certified. If the recovered data errors, recovered  
(and unrecovered) equipment errors exceed the threshold values, the disk needs to  
be replaced.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The syntax of the  
command is as follows:  
diag -c -d deviceName -T "certify"  
Certify Hardfile attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
This selection is used to certify physical disks attached to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter.  
Certify reads the entire disk and checks for recovered errors, unrecovered errors,  
and reassigned errors. If these errors exceed the threshold values, the user is  
prompted to replace the physical disk.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The syntax of the  
command is as follows:  
diag -c -d < RAID adapterName -T "certify {-l chID | -A}"  
Flag  
-I  
-A  
Description  
Physical Disk channel/ID (for example: 27)  
All disks  
Change Hardware Vital Product Data  
Use this service aid to display the Display/Alter VPD Selection Menu. The menu lists all  
resources installed on the system. When a resource is selected, a menu displays that  
lists all the VPD for that resource.  
Note: The user cannot alter the VPD for a specific resource unless it is not machine  
readable.  
Configure Dials and LPFKeys  
This service aid provides a tool for configuring and removing dials/LPFKs (Lighted  
Program Function Keys) to the asynchronous serial ports.  
A TTY must be defined on the async port before the Dials and LPFKs can be  
configured on the port. Prior to AIX Version 4.2, the Dials and LPFKs could only be  
configured on the standard serial ports. For AIX Version 4.2 and later, the Dials and  
LPFKs can be configured on any async port.  
This selection invokes the SMIT utility to allow Dials and LPFKs configuration. A TTY  
must be in the available state on the async port before the Dials and LPFKs can be  
configured on the port. The task allows an async adapter to be configured, then a TTY  
port defined on the adapter, and then Dials and LPFKs can be defined on the port.  
116 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configure ISA Adapter  
This task uses SMIT to allow the identification and configuration of ISA adapters on  
systems that have an ISA bus and adapters.  
Diagnostic support for ISA adapters not shown in the list may be supported from a  
supplemental diskette. You can use the Process Supplemental Media task to add ISA  
adapter support from a supplemental diskette.  
Whenever an ISA adapter is installed, this service aid must be run and the adapter  
configured before the adapter can be tested. You must also run this service aid to  
remove an ISA adapter from the system whenever an ISA adapter is physically  
removed from the system.  
If diagnostics are run on an ISA adapter that has been removed from the system, the  
diagnostics fail because the system cannot detect the ISA adapter.  
Configure Reboot Policy  
This service aid controls how the system tries to recover from a system crash. Use this  
service aid to display and change the following settings for the Reboot Policy.  
Note: Some of the following settings may not be displayed by this service aid.  
v
Maximum Number of Reboot Attempts  
Enter a number that is 0 or greater.  
Note: A value of 0 indicates ’do not attempt to reboot’ to a crashed system.  
This number is the maximum number of consecutive attempts to reboot the system.  
The term reboot, in the context of this service aid, is used to describe bringing  
system hardware back up from scratch, for example from a system reset or power  
on.  
When the reboot process completes successfully, the reboot attempts count is reset  
to 0, and a restart begins. The termrestart, in the context of this service aid, is used  
to describe the operating system activation process. Restart always follows a  
successful reboot.  
When a restart fails, and a restart policy is enabled, the system attempts to reboot  
for the maximum number of attempts.  
v
v
Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When ’Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy’ is set to Yes, the system attempts to  
reboot from a crash if the operating system has an enabled Defined Restart or  
Reboot Policy.  
When ’Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy’ is set to No, or the operating system  
restart policy is undefined, then the restart policy is determined by the ’Supplemental  
Restart Policy’.  
Enable Supplemental Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The ’Supplemental Restart Policy’, if enabled, is used when the O/S Defined Restart  
Policy is undefined, or is set to False.  
When surveillance detects operating system inactivity during restart, an enabled  
’Supplemental Restart Policy’ causes a system reset and the reboot process begins.  
v
v
Call-Out Before Restart(on/off)  
When enabled, Call-Out Before Restart allows the system to call out (on a serial port  
that is enabled for call out) when an operating system restart is initiated. Such calls  
can be valuable if the number of these events becomes excessive, thus signalling  
bigger problems.  
Enable Unattended Start Mode (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When enabled, ’Unattended Start Mode’ allows the system to recover from the loss  
of ac power.  
If the system was powered on when the ac loss occurred, the system reboots when  
power is restored. If the system was powered off when the ac loss occurred, the  
system remains off when power is restored.  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -b  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy  
The Remote Maintenance Policy includes modem configurations and phone numbers to  
use for remote maintenance support. Use this service aid to display and change the  
following settings for the Remote Maintenance Policy.  
Note: Some of the following settings may not be displayed by this service aid.  
v
Configuration File for Modem on S1 Configuration File for Modem on S2  
Enter the name of a modem configuration file to load on either serial port 1 (S1) or  
serial port 2 (S2). The modem configuration files are located in the directory  
/usr/share/modems. If a modem file is already loaded, a ′Modem file currently  
loaded message displays.  
v
Modem file currently loaded on S1 Modem file currently loaded on S2  
This is the name of the file that is currently loaded on serial port 1 or serial port 2.  
Note: These settings are only shown when a modem file is loaded for a serial port.  
Call In Authorized on S1 (on/off) Call In Authorized on S2 (on/off)  
Call In allows the Service Processor to receive a call from a remote terminal.  
Call Out Authorized on S1 (on/off) Call Out Authorized on S2 (on/off)  
Call Out allows the Service Processor to place calls for maintenance.  
S1 Line Speed S2 Line Speed  
v
v
v
v
A list of line speeds is available by using ’List’ on the screen.  
Service Center Phone Number  
Telephone number of the service center computer. The service center usually  
includes a computer that takes calls from systems with call-out capability. This  
118 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
computer is referred to as the catcher. The catcher expects messages in a specific  
format to which the Service Processor conforms. For more information about the  
format and catcher computers, refer to the README file in the AIX  
/usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact the service provider for the correct  
telephone number to enter here.  
v
Customer Administration Center Phone Number  
Telephone number of the System Administration Center computer (catcher) that  
receives problem calls from systems. Contact the system administrator for the correct  
telephone number to enter here.  
v
v
Digital Pager Phone Number In Event of Emergency  
Number for a pager carried by someone who responds to problem calls from your  
system.  
Customer Voice Phone Number  
Telephone number for a telephone near the system, or answered by someone  
responsible for the system. This is the telephone number left on the pager for  
callback.  
v
Customer System Phone Number  
Telephone number to which your system’s modem is connected. The service or  
administration center representatives need this number to make direct contact with  
your system for problem investigation. This is also referred to as the Call-in phone  
number.  
v
v
Customer Account Number  
This number is available for service providers to use for record keeping and billing.  
Call Out Policy-Numbers to call if failure  
This is set to either first or all. If the call-out policy is set to first, call out stops at the  
first successful call to one of the following numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administration Center  
3. Pager  
If Call Out Policy is set toall, call-out attempts to call all of the following numbers in  
the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administration Center  
3. Pager  
v
v
v
Customer RETAIN Login ID Customer RETAIN Login Password  
These settings apply to the RETAIN service function.  
Remote Timeout, in seconds Remote Latency, in seconds  
These settings are functions of the service provider’s catcher computer.  
Number of Retries While Busy  
This is the number of times the system should retry calls that resulted in busy  
signals.  
v
System Name (System Administrator Aid)  
Name given to the system and is used when reporting problem messages.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: If you provide the system name, your support team can quickly identify the  
location, configuration, and history of your system.  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -m  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On Policy  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.  
This service aid allows the user to power-on a system by telephone from a remote  
location. If the system is powered off, and Ring Indicate Power On is enabled, the  
system powers on at a predetermined number of rings. If the system is already on, no  
action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not answered, and the caller  
receives no feedback that the system has powered on.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Ring Indicate  
Power On Policy.  
Note: Some of the following settings may not be displayed by this service aid.  
v
v
Power On Via Ring Indicate (on/off)  
Number of Rings until Power On  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -r  
Configure Ring Indicate Power On  
Note: This service aid runs on RSPC system units only.  
This service aid allows the user to display and change the NVRAM settings for the Ring  
Indicate Power On capability of the service processor.  
The settings allows the user to:  
v
Enable or Disable power on from Ring Indicate  
Read or Set the number of rings before power on  
v
Configure Service Processor  
Note: This service aid runs on RSPC system units only.  
This service aid allows you to display and change the NVRAM settings for the service  
processor.  
This service aid supports the following functions:  
120 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
v
v
Surveillance Setup  
Modem Configuration  
Call In/Call Out Setup  
Site-Specific Call In/Call Out Setup  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup  
Surveillance Setup  
This selection allows you to display and change the NVRAM settings for the  
surveillance capability of the service processor.  
The settings allow you to:  
v
v
v
Enable or disable surveillance  
Set the surveillance time interval, in minutes  
Set the surveillance delay, in minutes  
The current settings are read from NVRAM (Nonvolatile Random Access Memory) and  
displayed on the screen. Any changes made to the data shown are written to NVRAM.  
Modem Configuration  
Use this selection when setting the NVRAM for a modem attached to any of the Service  
Processor’s serial ports. The user inputs the file name of the modem configuration file  
and the serial port number the formatted modem configuration file is read, converted for  
NVRAM, and then loaded into NVRAM. Refer to the Service Processor Installation and  
User’s Guide for more information.  
Call In/Out Setup  
This selection allows the user to display and change the NVRAM settings for the Call  
In/Call Out capability of the service processor.  
The settings allows the user to:  
v
v
v
Enable or Disable call in on either serial port  
Enable or Disable call out on either serial port  
Set the line speed on either serial port  
Site-Specific Call In/Out Setup  
This selection allows you to display and change the NVRAM settings that are  
site-specific for the call in/call out capability of the service processor.  
The site-specific NVRAM settings allow you to set the following:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Phone number for the service center  
Phone number for the customer administration center  
Phone number for a digital pager  
Phone number for the customer system to call in  
Phone number for the customer voice phone  
Customer account number  
Call out policy  
Customer RETAIN id  
Customer RETAIN password  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
v
Remote timeout value  
Remote latency value  
Number of retries while busy  
System name  
The current settings are read from VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) and  
displayed on the screen. Any changes made to the data shown are written to NVRAM.  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup  
This selection controls how the system tries to recover from a system crash.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the following:  
v
v
v
Boot Policy Setup.  
Minimum Number of Reboot Attempts  
Enter a number that is 0 or greater.  
Note: A value of 0 indicates ″do not attempt to reboot″ to a crashed system.  
This number is the maximum number of consecutive attempts allowed to reboot the  
system. The term reboot, when used in context of this service aid, describes the  
system hardware being brought back up. Examples would be a system reset or  
turning on the power on.  
When the maximum number of reboot attempts is exceeded, the system calls out if  
that function has been enabled.  
When the reboot process completes successfully, the reboot-attempts count is reset  
to 0, and a restart begins. The term restart, when used in context of this service aid,  
describes the operating system activation process. Restart always follows a  
successful reboot.  
When a restart fails, and a restart policy is enabled, the system attempts to reboot  
for the maximum number of reboot attempts.  
v
v
Enable Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When the service processor detects operating system inactivity, an enabled ″Restart  
Policy″ causes a system reset, and the reboot process begins.  
Call-Out Before Restart (on/off)  
When enabled, ″Call-Out Before Restart″ allows the system to call out (on a serial  
port that is enabled for call out) when an operating system restart is initiated. Such  
call-outs can be valuable if the number becomes excessive, which signals bigger  
problems  
v
Enable Unattended Start Mode (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When enabled, ″Unattended Start Mode″ allows the system to recover from the loss  
of ac power.  
122 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If the system was powered on when the ac loss occurred, the system reboots when  
power is restored. If the system was powered off when the ac loss occurred, the  
system remains off when power is restored.  
Configure Surveillance Policy  
This service aid monitors the system for hang conditions; that is, hardware or software  
failures that cause operating system inactivity. When enabled, and surveillance detects  
operating system inactivity, a call is placed to report the failure.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Surveillance  
Policy.  
Note: Some of the following settings may not be displayed by this service aid.  
v
v
Surveillance  
Surveillance Time Interval, in minutes  
Maximum time between heartbeats from the operating system.  
Surveillance Delay, in minutes  
v
v
Time to delay between when the operating system is in control and when to begin  
operating system surveillance.  
Changes are to take effect immediately  
Set this to yes if the changes made to the settings in this menu are to take place  
immediately. Otherwise, the changes take effect beginning with the next system boot.  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line by entering:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -s  
Create Customized Configuration Diskette  
This selection invokes the Diagnostic Package Utility Service Aid, which allows the user  
to create a stand-alone diagnostic package configuration diskette.  
The Stand-Alone Diagnostic Package Configuration Diskette allows the following to be  
changed from the console:  
v
Default refresh rate for a LFT (Limited Function Terminal)  
The refresh rate used by the stand-alone diagnostic package is 60Hz. If the display’s  
refresh rate is 77Hz, set the refresh rate to 77.  
v
Different async terminal console  
Use this service aid to create a console configuration file that allows a terminal  
attached to any RS232 or RS422 adapter to be selected as a console device. The  
default device is RS232 TTY attached to the first standard serial port (S1).  
Delete Resource from Resource List  
Use this task to delete resources from the resource list.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and have not  
been deleted from the Diagnostic Test List are listed. If no resources are  
available to be deleted, then none are listed.  
Disk Maintenance  
v
Disk to Disk Copy  
Display/Alter Sector  
v
Disk to Disk Copy  
Notes:  
1. This service aid cannot be used to update to a different size drive. The service aid  
only supports copying from a SCSI drive to another SCSI drive of similar size.  
2. Use the migratepv command when copying the contents to other disk drive types.  
This command also works when copying SCSI disk drives or when copying to a  
different size SCSI disk drive. Refer to System Management Guide: Operating  
System and Devices for a procedure on migrating the contents of a physical  
volume.  
This selection allows you to recover data from an old drive when replacing it with a new  
drive. The service aid recovers all LVM (Logical Volume Manager) software reassigned  
blocks. To prevent corrupted data from being copied to the new drive, the service aid  
aborts if an unrecoverable read error is detected. To help prevent possible problems  
with the new drive, the service aid aborts if the number of bad blocks being reassigned  
reaches a threshold.  
This service aid requires that both the old and new disks be installed in or attached to  
the system with unique SCSI addresses. This requires that the new disk drive SCSI  
address must be set to an address that is not currently in use and the drive be installed  
in an empty location. If there are no empty locations,then one of the other drives must  
be removed. Once the copy is complete, only one drive may remain installed. Either  
remove the target drive to return to the original configuration, or use the following steps  
to complete the replacement of the old drive with the new drive.  
1. Remove both drives.  
2. Set the SCSI address of the new drive to the SCSI address of the old drive.  
3. Install the new drive in the old drive’s location.  
4. Install any other drives that were removed into their original location.  
To prevent problems that can occur when running this service aid from disk, it is  
suggested that when possible this service aid be run from the diagnostics that are  
loaded from removable media.  
124 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display/Alter Sector  
This selection allows the user to display and alter information on a disk sector. Use this  
service aid carefully, because inappropriate modification to some disk sectors may  
result in total loss of all data on the disk. Sectors are addressed by their decimal sector  
number. Data is displayed both in hex and in ASCII. To prevent corrupted data from  
being incorrectly corrected, the service aid does not display information that cannot be  
read correctly.  
Display Configuration and Resource List  
This service aid displays only the item header for all installed resources. Use this  
service aid when there is no need to see the VPD (vital product data).  
Display Firmware Device Node Information  
This task displays the firmware device node information that appears on CHRP  
platforms. The format of the output data may not be the same among different levels of  
AIX. It is intended to gather more information about individual or particular devices on  
the system.  
Display Hardware Error Report  
This service aid uses the errpt command to provide a tool for viewing the hardware  
error log.  
The Display Error Summary and Display Error Detail selections provide the same type  
of report as the errpt command.  
Display Hardware Vital Product Data  
This service aid displays all installed resources, along with any VPD (Vital Product  
Data) for those resources. Use this service aid when you want to look at the VPD for a  
specific resource.  
Display Machine Check Error Log  
Note: The Machine Check Error Log Service Aid is available only on Stand-Alone  
Diagnostics.  
When a machine check occurs, information is collected and logged in an NVRAM error  
log before the system unit shuts down. This information is logged in the AIX error log  
and cleared from NVRAM when the system is rebooted from the hard disk, LAN, or  
stand-alone media. When booting from Stand-Alone Diagnostics, this service aid can  
convert the logged information into a readable format that can help to isolate the  
problem. When booting from the hard disk or LAN, the information can be viewed from  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the AIX error log, using the Hardware Error Report Service Aid. In either case, the  
information is analyzed when running the sysplanar0 diagnostics in Problem  
Determination Mode.  
Display Microcode Level  
Use this task to display the current level of microcode on an adapter or device. The  
syntax of the command is as follows: diag -c -d device_name -T "disp_mcode"  
Display or Change Bootlist  
This service aid allows the bootlist to be displayed, altered, or erased.  
The system attempts to perform an IPL from the first device in the list. If the device is  
not a valid IPL device or if the IPL fails, the system proceeds in turn to the other listed  
devices to attempt an IPL.  
Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options  
The Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options task allows the diagnostic  
run-time options to be set.  
Note: The run-time options are used only when selecting the Run Diagnostic task.  
The run-time options are:  
v
Display Diagnostic Mode Selection Menus  
This option allows the user to enable displaying THE DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
SELECTION MNU (the default is off).  
v
Run Tests Multiple Times  
This option allows the user to enable running the diagnostic in loop mode (the default  
is off).  
Note: This option is only displayed when you run Online Diagnostics in Service  
Mode.  
v
v
v
Include Advanced Diagnostics  
This option allows the user to enable including the Advanced Diagnostics (the default  
is off).  
Include Error Log Analysis  
This option allows the user to enable including the Error Log Analysis (ELA) (the  
default is off).  
Number of Days Used to Search Error Log  
This option allows the user to select the number of days to search the AIX error log  
for errors when running the Error Log Analysis. The default is 7 days, but it can be  
changed from 1 to 60 days.  
v
Display Progress Indicators  
126 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This option allows the user to enable the progress indicators when running the  
Diagnostic Applications. The progress indicators display at the bottom of the screen,  
which indicate that the test being run (the default is on).  
v
v
Diagnostic Event Logging  
This option allows the user to enable logging information to the Diagnostic Event Log  
(the default is on).  
Diagnostic Event Log File Size  
This option allows the user to select the maximum size of the Diagnostic Event Log.  
The default size for the Diagnostic Event Log is 100 KB. The size can be increased  
in 100 KB increments to a maximum of 1 MB.  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results  
Note: This service aid is not available when you load the diagnostics from a source  
other than a hard disk drive or a network.  
This service aid allows a service representative to display result from a previous  
diagnostic session. When the Display Previous Diagnostic Results option is selected,  
the user can view up to 25 no trouble found (NTF) and service request number (SRN)  
results.  
This service aid displays Diagnostic Event Log information, which can be displayed in  
either short or long version. The information is displayed in reverse chronological order.  
This information is not from the AIX operating system error log. This information is  
stored in the /var/adm/ras directory.  
You can run the command from the AIX command line by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/diagrpt [[-o] | [-smmddyy mmddyy] | [-a] | [-r]]  
Flag  
-o  
Description  
Displays the last diagnostic results file stored in the  
/etc/lpp/diagnostics/data directory  
-s mmddyy  
-a  
-r  
Displays all diagnostic result files logged since the date specified  
Displays the long version of the Diagnostic Event Log  
Displays the short version of the Diagnostic Event Log  
Display Resource Attributes  
This task displays the Customized Device Attributes associated with a selected  
resource. This task is similar to running the lsattr -E -l resource command.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Service Hints  
This service aid reads and displays the information in the CEREADME file from the  
diagnostics media. This file contains information that is not in the publications for this  
version of the diagnostics. The file also contains information about using this particular  
version of diagnostics.  
Display Software Product Data  
This task uses SMIT to display information about the installed software and provides  
the following functions:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
List Installed Software  
List Applied but Not Committed Software Updates  
Show Software Installation History  
Show Fix (APAR) Installation Status  
List Fileset Requisites  
List Fileset Dependents  
List Files Included in a Fileset  
List Fileset containing file  
Display System Environmental Sensors  
This service aid displays the environmental sensors implemented on a CHRP system.  
The information displayed is the sensor name, physical location code, literal value of  
the sensor status, and the literal value of the sensor reading.  
The sensor status can be any one of the following:  
v
v
Normal – The sensor reading is within the normal operating range.  
Critical High – The sensor reading indicates a serious problem with the device. Run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 to determine what repair action is needed.  
v
v
Critical Low – The sensor reading indicates a serious problem with the device. Run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 to determine what repair action is needed.  
Hardware Busy – The system has repeatedly returned a busy indication, and a  
reading is not available. Try the service aid again. If the problem continues, run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 in problem determination mode to determine what repair  
action is needed.  
v
v
v
Hardware Error - The sensor could not be read because of a hardware error. Run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 in problem determination mode to determine what repair  
action is needed.  
Warning High – The sensor reading indicates a problem with the device. This could  
become a critical problem if action is not taken. Run diagnostics on sysplanar0 to  
determine what repair action is needed.  
Warning Low – The sensor reading indicates a problem with the device. This could  
become a critical problem if action is not taken. Run diagnostics on sysplanar0 to  
determine what repair action is needed.  
128 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This service aid can also be run as a command. Use the command to list the sensors  
and their values in a text format, list the sensors and their values in numerical format,  
or a specific sensor can be queried to return either the sensor status or sensor value.  
Run the command by entering one of the following:  
Note: These commands work only when the flags are entered one at a time (such as  
those shown in Examples 1 and 2)  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -l | -a /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t  
token -i index [-v]  
Flag  
-l  
-a  
Description  
List the sensors and their values in a text format.  
List the sensors and their values in a numerical format. For each sensor, the  
following numerical values are displayed as:  
token index status measuredvalue  
location code  
-t token  
-i index  
-v  
Specifies the sensor token to query.  
Specifies the sensor index to query.  
Indicates to return the sensor measured value. The sensor status is returned  
by default.  
Examples  
1. Display a list of the environmental sensors:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -l  
This is the results of running the example command only.  
Sensor = Fan Speed Status = Normal Value = 2436 RPM Location Code = F1  
Sensor = Power Supply Status = Normal Value = Present and operational Location  
Code = V1  
Sensor = Power Supply Status = Critical low Value = Present and not operational  
Location Code = V2  
2. Display a list of the environmental sensors in a numerical list:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -a  
This is the result of running the example command only.  
3 0 11 87 P1 9001 0 11 2345 F1 9004 0 11 2 V1 9004 1 9 2 V2  
3. Return the status of sensor 9004, index 1:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t 9004 -i 1  
This is the result of running the example command only.  
4. Return the value of sensor 9004, index 1:  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t 9004 -i 1 -v  
This is the result of running the example command only.  
Display Test Patterns  
This service aid provides a means of adjusting system display units by providing  
displayable test patterns. You can select the display type and test pattern. After you  
make the selections, the test pattern displays.  
Download Microcode  
This service aid provides a way to copy microcode to an adapter or device. The service  
aid presents a list of adapters and devices that use microcode. After the adapter or  
device is selected, you can check the current level and download the needed  
microcode.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The following sections guide  
you for a particular type of adapter or device.  
Download Microcode to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
The syntax of the command for a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter is as follows: diag -c -d  
RAID adapterName -T "download [-B] [-D] [-P]"  
Flag  
-B  
-D  
Description  
Download boot block microcode (default to functional microcode).  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory).  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level).  
-P  
Download Microcode to Disk Drive Attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
The syntax of the command for a disk drive attached to a PCI RAID Adapter is as  
follows: diag -c -d RAID adapterName -T "download {-l chID | -A} [-D] [-P]"  
Flag  
-A  
-D  
-l  
Description  
All disk drives.  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory).  
RAID disk drive-physical disk channel/ID (for example 27).  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level).  
-P  
Download Microcode to a PCI FC-AL Adapter  
The syntax of the command for a PCI FC-AL Adapter is as follows: diag -c -d  
device_name -T "download [-s {diskette|disk} -f [-l {latest|previous}]"  
Flag  
-d  
Description  
Device name is the name of the adapter.  
-f  
-1  
-s  
Force the download even if the current level of microcode is not on the media.  
Level of microcode to download. The default is latest.  
Microcode source of the new microcode. The default value is disk.  
The microcode image file must be in /etc/microcode.  
130 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download Microcode to Other Devices  
The syntax of the command is as follows: diag -c -d device_name -T "download [-s  
diskette ] [-l previous] [-F]"  
Flag  
-F  
Description  
Force flag. Required to download microcode if the current level is unavailable  
on the source.  
-l  
Microcode level. Latest is default.  
-s  
Microcode source. /etc/microcode is default. Default source device is disk.  
Fiber Channel RAID Service Aids  
The Fibre Channel RAID (Redundant Array Independent Disk) service aids contain the  
following functions:  
Certify LUN  
This selection reads and checks each block of data in the LUN (Logical Unit  
Number). If excessive errors are encountered the user is notified.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. The syntax of the fastpath  
command is as follows: diag -T "certify"  
Certify Spare Physical Disk  
This selection allows the user to certify (check integrity of the data) on drives  
that are designated as spares.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. The syntax of the fastpath  
command is as follows: diag -T "certify"  
Format Physical Disk  
This selection formats a selected disk drive.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. The syntax of the fastpath  
command is as follows: diag -T "format"  
Array Controller Microcode Download  
This selection allows the microcode on the Fibre Channel RAID controller to be  
updated when required.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. The syntax of the fastpath  
command is as follows: diag -T "download"  
Physical Disk Microcode Download  
This selection is used to update the microcode on any of the disk drives in the  
array.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. The syntax of the fastpath  
command is as follows: diag -T "download"  
Update EEPROM  
This selection is used to update the contents of the EEPROM (Electrically  
Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) on a selected controller.  
Replace Controller  
Use this selection when it is necessary to replace a controller in the array.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware  
This task allows the Flash firmware on the SysKonnect SK-NET FDDI adapter to be  
updated.  
Format Media  
This task allows the selection of diskettes, hardfiles, or optical media to be formatted.  
Each selection is described below.  
Hardfile Attached to SCSI Adapter (non-RAID)  
v
Hardfile Format  
Writes all of the disk. The pattern written on the disk is device-dependent; that is,  
some drives might write all 0s, while some might write hexadecimal number 5F.  
–
–
Resource Selection List (choice of floppy drive or hard drive)  
If floppy (fd0):  
-
-
-
Diskette Media Service Aid  
Choose type of diskette to format  
Formatting occurs  
–
If Hard drive (hdisk0)  
-
-
-
-
Format Media Task  
Format and Certify Disk  
Format without Certify  
Erase Disk  
v
v
Hardfile Format and Certify  
Performs the same function as hard file Format. After the format is completed, certify  
runs. This certify reassigns all bad blocks that are encountered.  
Hardfile Erase Disk  
This option can be used to overwrite (remove) all data currently stored in  
user-accessible blocks of the disk. The Erase Disk option writes one or more  
patterns to the disk. An additional option allows data in a selectable block to be read  
and displayed on the system console.  
To use the Erase Disk option, specify the number (0-3) of patterns to be written.  
Select the patterns to be written; the patterns are written serially. That is, the first  
pattern is written to all blocks. Then the next pattern is written to all blocks,  
overlaying the previous pattern. A random pattern is written by selecting the Write  
random pattern? option.  
Note: The Erase Disk service aid has not been certified as meeting the Department  
of Defense or any other organizations’ security guidelines.  
If the data on the drive is to be overwritten, use the following steps:  
1. Use the Erase Disk selection to overwrite the data on the drive.  
2. Run a format without certify.  
3. Run a second pass of the Erase Disk selection.  
132 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For a newly installed drive, you can ensure that all blocks on the drive are  
overwritten with your pattern when you use the following procedure:  
1. Format the drive.  
2. Check the defect MAP (Maintenance Analysis Procedure) by running the Erase  
Disk selection.  
Note: If you use the Format and Certify option, there may be some blocks which  
get placed into the grown defect MAP.  
3. If there are bad blocks in the defect MAP, record the information presented and  
ensure that this information is kept with the drive. This data is used when the  
drive is to be overwritten.  
4. Use the drive as you would normally.  
5. When the drive is no longer needed and is to be erased, run the same version of  
the Erase Disk selection that was used in step 2.  
Note: Using the same version of the service aid is only critical if there were any  
bad blocks found in step 3.  
6. Compare the bad blocks which were recorded with the drive in step 3 with those  
that now appear in the grown defect MAP.  
Note: If there are differences between the saved data and the newly obtained  
data, then all sectors on this drive cannot be overwritten. The new bad  
blocks are not overwritten.  
7. If the bad block list is the same, continue running the service aid to overwrite the  
disk with the chosen pattern(s).  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The syntax of the command is  
as follows: diag -c -d deviceName -T "format [-s* fmtcert | erase -a {read |  
write}] [-F]"  
Flag  
Description  
fmtcert Formats and certifies the disk.  
*
Available in no-console mode only.  
-F  
Force flag. Forces disk erasure even if all blocks cannot be erased due to  
errors accessing grown defect map.  
Note: Erase option in command line mode uses default values. To selectively read or  
write, use the diag command in console mode.  
Hardfile Attached to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
This function formats the physical disks attached to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter. This  
task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The syntax of the command is as  
follows: diag -c -d RAID adapterName -T "format {-l chId | -A }"  
Flag  
-l  
Description  
Physical disk channel/ID (An example of physical disk channel/ID is 27, where  
the channel is 2 and the ID is 7.)  
All disks  
-A  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Optical Media  
This function formats the media without certifying.  
v
Optical Media Initialize  
Formats the media without certifying. This function does not reassign the defective  
blocks or erase the data on the media. It provides a quick way of formatting the  
media and cleaning the disk.  
Note: It takes approximately one minute to format the media.  
v
Optical Media Format and Certify  
Formats and certifies the media. This function reassigns the defective blocks and  
erases all data on the media.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The following usage  
statement describes the syntax of the command: diag -c -d deviceName -T "format  
[-s {initialize | fmtcert} ]"  
Option Description  
initialize  
Formats media without certifying  
fmtcert Formats and certifies the media  
Diskette Format  
This selection formats a diskette by writing patterns to it.  
Generic Microcode Download  
This service aid provides a means of executing a generic script from a diskette. The  
intended purpose for this generic script is to load microcode to a supported resource.  
This script can run whatever program is required to download the microcode onto the  
adapter or device.  
This service aid is supported in both concurrent and stand-alone modes from disk, LAN,  
or loadable media.  
On entry, the service aid displays information about what it does. It then asks for a  
Genucode diskette to be inserted into the diskette drive. The diskette must be in tar  
format. The service aid restores the script file genucode to the /tmp directory. Then the  
script is executed. The script must at that point then pull any other needed files from  
the diskette. The script should then execute whatever program is necessary in order to  
perform its function. On completion, a status code is returned, and the user is returned  
to the service aid. .  
The genucode script should have a # ! /usr/bin/ksh line at the beginning of the file.  
Return status of 0 should be returned if the program was successful, else a non-zero  
status should be returned  
134 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Local Area Network Analyzer  
This selection is used to exercise the LAN communications adapters (Token-Ring,  
Ethernet, and (FDDI) Fiber Distributed Data Interface). The following services are  
available:  
v
Connectivity testing between these two network stations. Data is transferred between  
the two stations, requiring the user to input the Web addresses of both stations.  
v
Monitoring ring (Token-Ring only). The ring is monitored for a specified period of  
time. Soft and hard errors are analyzed.  
Log Repair Action  
The Log Repair Action task logs a repair action in the AIX Error Log. A Repair Action  
Log indicates that a FRU has been replaced, and error log analysis should not be done  
for any errors logged before the repair action. The Log Repair Action task lists all  
resources. Replaced resources can be selected from the list, and when commit (F7  
Key) is selected, a repair action is logged for each selected resource.  
Periodic Diagnostics  
This selection provides a tool for configuring periodic diagnostics and automatic error  
log analysis. You can select a hardware resource to be tested once a day, at a  
user-specified time. If the resource cannot be tested because it is busy, error log  
analysis is performed. Hardware errors logged against a resource can also be  
monitored by enabling Automatic Error Log Analysis. This allows error log analysis to be  
performed every time a hardware error is put into the error log. If a problem is detected,  
a message is posted to the system console and a mail message sent to the users  
belonging to the system group with information about the failure such as service  
request number.  
The service aid provides the following functions:  
v
v
v
v
v
Add or delete a resource to the periodic test list  
Modify the time to test a resource  
Display the periodic test list  
Modify the error notification mailing list  
Disable or enable Automatic Error Log Analysis  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify  
This selection identifies physical disks connected to a PCI SCSI-2 F/W RAID adapter.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The syntax of the command is  
as follows:  
diag -c -d pci RAID adapter -T identify  
Process Supplemental Media  
Diagnostic Supplemental Media contains all the necessary diagnostic programs and  
files required to test a particular resource. The supplemental media is normally released  
and shipped with the resource as indicated on the diskette label. Diagnostic  
Supplemental Media must be used when the device support has not been incorporated  
into the latest diagnostic CD-ROM.  
This task processes the Diagnostic Supplemental Media. Insert the supplemental media  
when you are prompted, then press Enter. After processing has completed, go to the  
Resource Selection list to find the resource to test.  
Run Diagnostics  
The Run Diagnostics task invokes the Resource Selection List menu. When the commit  
key is pressed, diagnostics are run on all selected resources.  
The procedures for running the diagnostics depend on the state of the diagnostics  
run-time options. See “Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options” on page 126.  
Run Error Log Analysis  
The Run Error Log Analysis task invokes the Resource Selection List menu. When the  
commit key is pressed, Error Log Analysis is run on all selected resources.  
Run Exercisers  
This task provides a tool to troubleshoot intermittent system problems on AIX version  
4.3.2 or later. This task provides an exerciser supervisor that controls the selected  
exercisers.  
When you select Run Exercisers from the Task Selection menu, the EXERCISER  
SELECTION menu displays. Select the exerciser you want to run. Each exerciser has  
other menus to set options for that exerciser.  
Exerciser Commands (Cmd)  
Use the following commands as needed in the exerciser menus and reports. Not all  
commands are available in each menu or report.  
Cmd  
Description  
136 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a
b
c
e
f
Acknowledge an error  
Back one page  
Toggle between cycle count and last error  
View the AIX error log  
Page forward one page  
Return to Main Menu  
q
r
Refresh screen  
s
x
Enable or disable beep on error  
Exit system exerciser  
Acronyms  
The following list describes abbreviations used in the exerciser reports. To toggle  
between two states for (example, Activate/Halt Devices), use the number of the device.  
Acronym  
Description  
COE  
CP  
DD  
Continue on error (use number to select.  
Device has run the specified number of cycles and is not running  
Exerciser has been terminated by a signal  
Device has stopped with an error  
Device is hung  
ER  
HG  
HOE  
RN  
Halt on error (use number to select)  
Device is running  
ST  
Device is stopped  
Memory Exerciser  
The memory exercisers are labeled memx, where x is a number for the exerciser.  
Multiple exercisers can be active.  
The memory exerciser requests as many memory buffers as possible from AIX. The  
exerciser then fills the memory buffers with specified bit patterns, then reads and  
compares the memory buffers to the specified bit patterns.  
On systems with multiple processors, a process is started for each processor. The free  
memory space is split evenly between the available processors, thus reducing the time  
required to exercise all of the memory.  
If the system is working properly, no comparison errors are produced. If a  
nonrecoverable memory error occurs, the system crashes. Recoverable memory errors  
are logged by the AIX operating system.  
The following items must be available to run this service aid:  
v
v
v
Online diagnostics loaded in maintenance mode  
128 KB of free space in /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data  
The following commands must be available:  
–
–
–
vmstat  
lsps  
bootinfo  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies  
Use this service aid to save or restore the settings from Ring Indicate Power On Policy,  
Surveillance Policy, Remote Maintenance Policy and Reboot Policy.  
v
Save Hardware Management Policies  
This selection writes all of the settings for the hardware management policies to the  
/etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/hmpolicies file:  
v
Restore Hardware Management Policies  
This selection restores all of the settings for the hardware management policies from  
the contents of the /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/hmpolicies file:  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line by entering:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -a  
Save or Restore Service Processor Configuration  
Note: This service aid runs on RSPC system units only.  
Use this service aid to save or restore the Service Processor Configuration to or from a  
file. The Service Processor Configuration includes the Ring Indicator Power On  
Configuration.  
v
Save Service Processor Configuration  
This selection writes all of the settings for the Ring Indicate Power On and the  
Service Processor to the /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/spconfig file.  
v
Restore Service Processor Configuration  
This selection restores all of the settings for the Ring Indicate Power On and the  
Service Processor from the /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data/spconfig file.  
SCSI BUS Analyzer  
This service aid enables you to diagnose a SCSI Bus problem in a free-lance mode.  
To use this service aid, the user should understand how a SCSI bus works. Use this  
service aid when the diagnostics cannot communicate with anything on the SCSI bus  
and cannot isolate the problem. Normally the procedure for finding a problem on the  
SCSI bus with this service aid is to start with a single device attached, ensure that it is  
working, then start adding additional devices and cables to the bus, ensuring that each  
one works. This service aid works with any valid SCSI bus configuration.  
The SCSI Bus Analyzer Service Aid transmits a SCSI Inquiry command to a selectable  
SCSI Address. The service aid then waits for a response. If no response is received  
within a defined amount of time, the service aid displays a timeout message. If an error  
occurs or a response is received, the service aid then displays one of the following  
messages:  
v
The exerciser transmitted a SCSI Inquiry command and received a valid  
response back without any errors being detected.  
138 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
v
The exerciser transmitted a SCSI Inquiry command and did not receive any  
response or error status back. Check that the address is valid, then retry.  
The exerciser transmitted a SCSI Inquiry command and the adapter indicated a  
SCSI bus error.  
The exerciser transmitted a SCSI Inquiry command and an adapter error  
occurred.  
The exerciser transmitted a SCSI Inquiry command and an unrecoverable I/O  
error occurred.  
When the SCSI Bus Service Aid is started, a description of the service aid displays.  
Press the Enter key to display the Adapter Selection menu. Use this menu to enter  
which address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command.  
When the adapter is selected, the SCSI Bus Address Selection menu displays. Use this  
menu to enter which address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command.  
After the address is selected, the SCSI Bus Test Run menu displays. Use this menu to  
transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command by pressing the Enter key. The service aid then  
indicates the status of the transmission. When the transmission is completed, the  
results of the transmission display.  
Notes:  
1. A Check Condition can be returned when the bus or device is working properly.  
2. AIX does not allow the command to be sent if the device is in use by another  
process.  
SCSI Device Identification and Removal  
This service aid allows the user to choose a SCSI device or location from a menu and  
to identify a device located in a system unit that uses a SCSI Enclosure Services (SES)  
backplane.  
The service aid also does the following:  
v
v
v
v
Generates a menu displaying all SCSI devices  
Lists the device and all of its sibling devices  
Lists all SCSI adapters and their ports  
Lists all SCSI devices on a port  
SCSI Tape Drive Service Aid  
This service aid enables you to obtain the status or maintenance information from a  
SCSI tape drive. Only some models of SCSI tape drive are supported.  
The service aid provides the following options:  
v
Display time since a tape drive was last cleaned.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The time since the drive was last cleaned displays on the screen. In addition, a  
message indicating whether the drive is recommended to be cleaned is also  
displayed.  
v
Copy a tape drive’s trace table.  
The trace table of the tape drive is written to diskettes or a file. The diskettes must  
be formatted for DOS. Writing the trace table may require several diskettes, but the  
actual number of diskettes is determined by the size of the trace table. Label the  
diskettes as follows:  
’TRACE x DAT’  
(where x is a sequential diskette number). The complete trace table consists of the  
sequential concatenation of all the diskette data files.  
When the trace table is written to a disk file, the service aid prompts for a file name.  
The default name is: ’/tmp/TRACE x ’, where x is the AIX name of the SCSI tape  
drive being tested.  
v
Display or copy a tape drive’s log sense information.  
The service aid provides options to display the log sense information to the screen,  
to copy it to a DOS formatted diskette or to copy it to a file. The file name  
LOGSENSE.DAT is used when the log sense data is written on the diskette. The  
service aid prompts for a file name when the log sense data is to be copied to a file.  
This service aid can be run directly from the AIX command line. The syntax of the  
command is as follows (path is /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/utape):  
utape [-h | -?] [-d device] [-n | -l | -t]  
OR  
utape -c -d device [-v] {-n | {-l | -t} { -D | -f [filename]}}  
Flag  
-c  
Description  
Run the service aid without displaying menus. The return code indicates  
success or failure. The output is suppressed except for the usage statement  
and the numeric value for hours since cleaned (if -n and -D flags are used).  
-D  
-f  
Copy data to diskette.  
Copy data to the filename given after this flag or to a default filename if no  
name is specified.  
-h, -?  
Display a usage statement and/or return code. If the -c flag is present, only the  
return code displays to indicate the service aid did not run. If the -c is not  
used, a usage statement displays and the service aid exits.  
-l  
Display or copy log sense information.  
Display time since drive was last cleaned.  
Copy trace table.  
-n  
-t  
-v  
Verbose mode. If the -c flag is present, the information displays on the screen.  
If the -n flag is present, the information about tape-head cleaning is printed.  
140 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spare Sector Availability  
This selection checks the number of spare sectors available on the optical disk. The  
spare sectors are used to reassign when defective sectors are encountered during  
normal usage or during a format and certify operation. Low availability of spare sectors  
indicates that the disk needs to be backed up and replaced. Formatting the disk does  
not improve the availability of spare sectors.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. The syntax of the command is  
as follows:  
diag -c -d < deviceName -T chkspares  
SSA Service Aid  
This service aid provides tools for diagnosing and resolving problems on SSA-attached  
devices. The following tools are provided:  
v
v
v
v
Set Service Mode  
Link Verification  
Configuration Verification  
Format and Certify Disk  
Update Disk-Based Diagnostics  
This service aid allows fixes (APARs) to be applied.  
This task invokes the SMIT Update Software by Fix (APAR) task. The task allows the  
input device and APARs to be selected. Any APAR can be installed using this task.  
Update System or Service Processor Flash  
This selection updates the system or service processor flash for CHRP system units.  
Further update and recovery instructions may be provided with the update. It is  
necessary to know the fully qualified path and file name of the flash-update image file  
that was provided. If the flash-update image file is on a diskette, the service aid can list  
the files on the diskette for selection.  
Refer to the update instructions or the system unit’s service guide to determine the level  
of the system unit or service processor flash.  
When run from online diagnostics, the flash-update image file is copied to the /var file  
system. If there is not enough space in the /var file system for the flash-update image  
file, an error is reported. If this occurs, exit the service aid, increase the size of the /var  
file system and retry the service aid. After the file is copied, a warning screen asks for  
confirmation to continue the update flash. Continuing the update flash reboots the  
system. The system does not return to diagnostics, and the current flash image is not  
saved. After the reboot, the /var/update_flash_image file can be removed.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the service aid is running from stand alone diagnostics, the flash-update image  
file is copied to the file system from diskette. The user needs to provide the image on a  
diskette since the user does not have access to remote file systems or any other files  
that are on the system. If enough space is not available, an error is reported stating  
additional system memory is needed. After the file is copied, a warning screen asks for  
confirmation to continue the update flash. Continuing the update flash reboots the  
system. The current flash image is not saved.  
The update_flash command can be used in place of this service aid. It is located in the  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin directory.  
Attention: The update_flash command reboots the entire system. Do not use this  
command if more than one user is logged in to the system.  
Update System Flash  
Note: This service aid runs on RSPC (Power PC Reference Platform) system units  
only.  
This selection updates the system flash for RSPC systems.  
The user provides a valid binary image either on diskette or from a qualified path name.  
The diskettes can be in DOS or in a backup format.  
The flash-update image is copied to the /var file system. If there is not enough space in  
the file system for the flash update image file, an error is reported. If this occurs,  
increase the file size of the /var file system. The current flash image is not saved. The  
command automatically removes the /var/update_flash_image file.  
After user confirmation, the command reboots the system twice to complete the flash  
update.  
7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aid  
The 7135 RAIDiant Array service aids contain the following functions:  
v
Certify LUN  
Reads and checks each block of data in the LUN. If excessive errors are  
encountered, the user is notified.  
v
Certify Spare Physical Disk  
Allows the user to certify (check the integrity of the data) on drives designated as  
spares.  
v
v
v
Format Physical Disk  
Used to format a selected disk drive.  
Array Controller Microcode Download  
Allows the microcode on the 7135 controller to be updated when required.  
Physical Disk Microcode Download  
142 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Used to update the microcode on any of the disk drives in the array.  
Update EEPROM  
v
v
Used to update the contents of the EEPROM on a selected controller.  
Replace Controller  
Used when it is necessary to replace a controller in the array.  
Adapter Microcode Download: Usage: diag -c -d deviceName -T "download  
[-B][-D][-P]"  
Flag  
-B  
Description  
Download boot block microcode (default to functional microcode)  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)  
-D  
-P  
Physical Disk Microcode Download: Usage: diag -c -d deviceName -T "download  
-l ChId [-D][-P]"  
Flag  
-l  
Description  
Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 27)  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)  
-D  
-P  
Physical Disk Format: Usage: diag -c -d deviceName -T "format -l ChId  
Flag  
-l  
Description  
Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 27)  
Physical Disk Certify: Usage: diag -c -d deviceName -T "certify -l ChId  
Flag  
-l  
Description  
Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 23)  
Physical Disk Identify: Usage: diag -c -d deviceName -T "identify"  
7318 Serial Communications Network Server Service Aid  
This service aid provides a tool for diagnosing terminal server problems.  
Chapter 6. Introducing Tasks and Service Aids 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
144 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. Using the System Verification Procedure  
Use the system verification procedure to check the system for correct operation.  
If you are analyzing a hardware problem, should use “Chapter 8. Hardware Problem  
Determination” on page 149.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
Notes:  
1. If this system unit is directly attached to another system unit or attached to a  
network, make sure that communications with the other system unit are stopped.  
2. This procedure requires use of all of the system resources. No other activity can be  
running on the system while you are doing this procedure.  
v
This procedure requires a display connected to the video port or an ASCII terminal  
attached to the S1 port.  
v
v
Before starting this procedure, stop all programs and the operating system.  
This procedure runs the Online Diagnostics in Service mode or Stand-alone  
Diagnostics. If the Online Diagnostics are installed, they should be run. See the  
operator manual for your type of ASCII terminal to find the key sequences you need  
to respond to the diagnostics.  
v
v
If you need more information about diagnostics, see “Chapter 5. Using the  
Standalone and Online Diagnostics” on page 107.  
If a console display is not selected, the diagnostics stop. The instructions for  
selecting a console display are displayed on all of the graphic displays and any  
terminal attached to the S1 port. Follow the displayed instructions to select a console  
display.  
v
Go to Step 2.  
Step 2. Loading the Diagnostics  
1. Stop all application programs running on the operating system.  
2. Stop the operating system.  
3. Turn the power off.  
4. If you are loading the Stand-alone Diagnostics and running them from an ASCII  
terminal, do the following:  
v
The attributes for the terminal must be set to match the defaults of the  
diagnostics.  
v
If you need to change any settings, record the normal settings, and be sure the  
terminal attributes are set to work with the diagnostics. If needed, see  
“Appendix D. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY Terminal” on  
page 167.  
5. Turn the power on.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. When the keyboard indicator appears, press F5 on the directly attached  
keyboard (5 on the ASCII keyboard) to load the Stand-alone Diagnostics or F6  
on the directly attached keyboard (6 on the ASCII terminal keyboard) to load the  
Online Diagnostics.  
b. Enter any requested passwords.  
c. Follow the instructions to select a console.  
6. When the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display, go to Step 3. If you are unable  
to load the diagnostics, go to “Problem Determination When Unable to Load  
Diagnostics” on page 156.  
Step 3. Running System Verification  
1. On the Diagnostic Operating Instructions screen, press the Enter key.  
2. If the terminal type has not been defined, use the Initialize Terminal option on the  
Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system environment before you  
can continue with the diagnostics.  
3. If you want to do a general checkout with minimal operator action, select the  
Diagnostic Routines option on the Function Selection menu.  
If you want to do a more complete checkout, including the use of wrap plugs, select  
the Advanced Diagnostics option on the Function Selection menu. The advanced  
diagnostics are primarily for the service representative; they may instruct you to  
install wrap plugs to better isolate a problem.  
4. Select the System Verification option on the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu.  
5. If you want to run a general checkout of all installed resources, Select the All  
Resource option on the Diagnostic Selection menu.  
If you want to check one particular resource, select that resource on the Diagnostic  
Selection menu.  
6. Go to Step 4.  
Step 4. Additional System Verification  
The checkout programs end with either the Testing Complete menu and a message  
stating  
No trouble was found  
or the A Problem Was Detected On (Time Stamp) menu with a SRN (service request  
number).  
1. Press Enter to return to the Diagnostic Selection menu.  
2. If you want to check other resources, select the resource. When you have checked  
all of the resources you need to check, go to Step 5.  
146 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics  
1. If you are running Online diagnostics, shut down the system using the following  
procedure:  
a. Press F3 repeatedly until you get to the Diagnostic Operating Instructions, then  
follow the displayed instructions.  
b. Press F3 once, and then follow the displayed instructions to shut down the  
system.  
2. If you changed any attributes on your ASCII terminal to run the diagnostics, change  
the settings back to normal.  
3. This completes the system verification. Report the SRN, if you received one, to the  
service organization. To do a normal boot, turn off the system unit and wait 30  
seconds, and then set the power switch of the system unit to On.  
Chapter 7. Using the System Verification Procedure 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
148 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination  
This chapter provides information on using stand-alone or online diagnostics to help you  
solve hardware problems. In addition, it provides a list of error codes and recommended  
actions that you can take to resolve the problem before contacting a service  
representative.  
Problem Determination Using the Stand-alone or Online Diagnostics  
Use this procedure to obtain a service request number (SRN) when you are able to  
load the Stand-alone or Online Diagnostics. If you are unable to load the Stand-alone or  
Online Diagnostics, go to “Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics”  
on page 156. The service organization uses the SRN to determine which field  
replaceable units (FRUs) are needed to restore the system to correct operation.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
Note: See the operator manual for your ASCII terminal to find the key sequences you  
need to respond to the diagnostic programs.  
v
v
The diagnostics can use a display connected to the video port or an ASCII terminal  
attached to a serial port.  
This procedure asks you to select the type of diagnostics you want to run. If you  
need more information about the types, see “Chapter 5. Using the Standalone and  
Online Diagnostics” on page 107.  
v
v
ISA adapters cannot be detected by the system. The ISA adapter Configuration  
Service Aid allows the identification and configuration of ISA adapters for Stand-alone  
Diagnostics. ISA adapters must be identified and configured before they can be  
tested.  
Go to “Step 2”.  
Step 2  
Are the Online Diagnostics installed on this system?  
NO  
Go to “Step 15” on page 154.  
Go to “Step 3” on page 150.  
YES  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 3  
Determine if the operating system is accepting commands.  
Is the operating system accepting commands?  
NO  
The system must be turned off in order to run diagnostics.  
Verify with the system administration and users that the system may  
be turned off. If so, then turn off the system unit and go to “Step 6” on  
page 151.  
YES  
Go to “Step 4”.  
Step 4  
Diagnostic tests can be run on many resources while the operating system is running.  
However, you can obtain more extensive problem isolation by running Online  
Diagnostics in Service mode.  
Do you want to run the Online Diagnostics in Service mode?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5”.  
YES  
Do the following to shut down your system:  
1. At the system prompt, stop the operating system using the  
appropriate command for your operating system.  
2. After the operating system is stopped, power off the system unit.  
3. Go to “Step 6” on page 151.  
Step 5  
This step starts the Online Diagnostics in concurrent mode.  
1. Log in as root user.  
2. Enter the diag command.  
3. Wait until the Diagnostic Operating Instructions are displayed, or wait for three  
minutes.  
Are the Diagnostic Operating Instructions displayed without any obvious console  
display problems?  
NO  
Do the following to shut down your system:  
1. At the system prompt, stop the operating system using the proper  
command for your operating system.  
2. After the operating system is stopped, power off the system unit.  
3. Go to “Step 6” on page 151.  
YES  
Go to “Step 9” on page 152.  
150 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 6  
This step loads Online Diagnostics in service mode. If you are unable to load the  
diagnostics, go to “Step 7”.  
1. Turn the power on.  
2. When the keyboard indicator (icon or text) appears, press F6 on the directly  
attached keyboard, or 6 on the ASCII terminal keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics  
are to be loaded.  
3. Enter any requested passwords.  
4. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
Did the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display without any obvious display  
problem?  
NO  
Go to “Step 7”.  
YES  
Go to “Step 9” on page 152.  
Step 7  
Starting at the top of the following table, find your symptom and follow the instructions  
given in the Action column.  
Symptom  
Action  
Display problem  
All other symptoms  
Go to “Step 8”.  
Go to “Problem Determination When Unable to  
Load Diagnostics” on page 156  
Step 8  
The following steps analyze a console display problem.  
Find your type of console display in the following table. Then follow the instructions  
given in the Action column.  
Console Display  
Action  
Display Device  
Go to the display documentation for problem  
determination.  
ASCII terminal  
Go to the problem-determination documentation  
for this type of terminal.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 9  
The diagnostics loaded correctly.  
Press the Enter key.  
Is the Function Selection menu displayed?  
NO  
Go to “Step 10”.  
Go to “Step 11”.  
YES  
Step 10  
There is a problem with the keyboard.  
Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table. Then follow the  
instructions given in the Action column.  
Keyboard Type  
Action  
101–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD001 and report the  
key used. The Enter key is within one  
horizontal row of keys.  
problem to the service organization.  
102–key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD002 and report the  
key used. The Enter key extends into two  
horizontal rows of keys.  
problem to the service organization.  
Kanji keyboard. Identify by the Japanese  
characters.  
Record error code M0KBD003 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
ASCII–terminal keyboard. This applies to all  
attached terminals.  
Go to the problem-determination documentation  
for this type terminal.  
Step 11  
1. If the terminal type has not been defined, use the Initialize Terminal option on the  
Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system environment before you  
can continue with the diagnostics. This is a separate and different operation from  
selecting the console display.  
2. Select Diagnostic Routines.  
3. Press the Enter key.  
4. In the following table, find the menu or system response you received when you  
selected Diagnostics. Follow the instructions given in the Action column.  
System Response  
Action  
The Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is  
displayed.  
Select Problem Determination and go to “Step  
12” on page 153.  
152 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Response  
Action  
The Missing Resource menu is displayed.  
Follow the displayed instructions until either the  
Diagnostic Mode Selection menu or an SRN is  
displayed.  
If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is  
displayed, select Problem Determination and go  
to “Step 12”.  
If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step  
14” on page 154.  
The New Resource menu is displayed.  
Follow the displayed instructions.  
Note: Devices attached to serial ports S1 or  
S2 do not appear on the New Resource menu.  
Also, ISA adapters do not appear unless they  
have been identified and configured.  
If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is  
displayed, select Problem Determination and go  
to “Step 12”.  
If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step  
14” on page 154.  
If you do not get an SRN, go to “Step 17” on  
page 155.  
The system does not respond to selecting  
Go to “Step 10” on page 152.  
diagnostics.  
Step 12  
Did the Diagnostic Selection Menu display?  
NO  
If Problem Determination was selected from the Diagnostic Mode  
Selection menu, and if a recent error has been logged in the error log,  
the diagnostics automatically begin testing the resource.  
Follow the displayed instructions.  
v
v
v
v
If the No Trouble Found screen is displayed, press Enter.  
If another resource is tested, repeat this step.  
If the Diagnostic Selection menu is displayed, go to “Step 13”.  
If an SRN is displayed, record it, and go to “Step 14” on page 154.  
YES  
Go to “Step 13”.  
Step 13  
The All Resources option checks most of the configured adapters and devices.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select and run the diagnostic tests on the resources you are having problems with or  
select the All Resources option to check all of the configured resources. Find the  
response in the following table and follow the instructions given in the Action column.  
Diagnostic Response  
An SRN is displayed.  
The system hangs.  
Action  
Go to “Step 14”.  
Report SRN 109-200.  
Press Enter and continue with the testing.  
The Testing Complete menu and the No  
trouble was found message is displayed, and  
you have not tested all of the resources.  
The Testing Complete menu and the No  
trouble was found message displayed and you  
have tested all of the resources.  
Go to “Step 17” on page 155.  
Step 14  
Step 15  
The diagnostics produced an SRN for this problem. Do the following:  
1. Record the SRN and other numbers read out.  
2. Report the SRN to the service organization.  
3. STOP. You have completed these procedures.  
When you are loading the Stand-alone Diagnostics, the attributes for the terminal must  
be set to match the defaults of the diagnostic programs. The ASCII terminal must be  
attached to serial port 1 on the system unit.  
Are you going to load Stand-alone Diagnostics and run them from a ASCII  
terminal?  
NO  
Go to “Step 16”.  
YES  
Go to “Running Diagnostics from a TTY Terminal” on page 109. and  
be sure your terminal attributes are set to work with the diagnostic  
programs.  
Return to “Step 16” when you finish checking the attributes. Record  
any settings that are changed.  
Step 16  
This step loads the Stand-alone Diagnostics. If you are unable to load the diagnostics,  
go to “Step 7” on page 151.  
1. Turn the power on.  
2. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. When the keyboard indicator displays, press F5 on the directly attached keyboard,  
or 5 on the ASCII keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
154 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Enter any requested passwords.  
5. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
Did the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display without any obvious display  
problem?  
NO  
Go to “Step 7” on page 151.  
Go to “Step 9” on page 152.  
YES  
Step 17  
The diagnostics did not find a hardware problem. If you still have a problem, contact  
your software support center.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics  
Use this procedure to obtain an error code. The service organization uses the error  
code to determine which field replaceable units (FRUs) are needed to restore the  
system to correct operation.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
v
The diagnostics can use a display connected to the video port or an ASCII terminal  
attached to a serial port.  
v
Go to “Step 2”.  
Step 2  
Step 3  
Are the Online Diagnostics installed on this system?  
NO  
Go to “Step 4” on page 157.  
Go to “Step 3”.  
YES  
This step attempts to load Online Diagnostics in service mode.  
1. Turn the power to off.  
2. Turn the power on.  
3. If the keyboard indicator displays, press F6 on the directly attached keyboard, or 6  
on the ASCII keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
4. Enter any requested passwords.  
5. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
6. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.  
Did the diagnostics load?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5” on page 157.  
Go to “Step 6” on page 159.  
YES  
156 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 4  
This step attempts to load the Stand-alone diagnostics.  
1. Turn the power to off.  
2. Turn the power to on.  
3. Insert the diagnostic CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.  
4. If the keyboard indicator displays, press F6 on the directly attached keyboard, or 6  
on the ASCII keyboard, to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
5. Enter any requested passwords.  
6. Follow any instructions to select a console.  
7. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.  
Did the diagnostics load?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5”.  
YES  
Go to “Step 6” on page 159.  
Step 5  
Starting at the top of the following table, find your symptom and follow the instructions  
given in the Action column.  
Symptom  
Action  
The power LED does not come on, or comes  
on and does not stay on.  
Check the power cable to the outlet. Check the  
circuit breakers and check for power at the  
outlet.  
Ensure the room temperature is within 60 -  
90°F.  
If you do not find a problem, record error code  
M0PS0000 and report the problem to the  
service organization.  
The system appears to be stopped and NO  
beep was heard from the system unit.  
Processor POST failure. Report error code  
M0CPU000.  
The system appears to be stopped and NO  
beep was heard from the system unit. E122,  
E123, or E124 is displayed on the operator  
panel display.  
No good memory could be found. Report error  
code M0MEM000.  
The system appears to be stopped. A beep was No good memory could be found. Report error  
heard from the system unit.  
code M0MEM001.  
The diagnostics are loaded and there was NO  
beep heard from the system unit during the IPL  
sequence.  
Record error code M0SPK001.  
The system stops with the Diagnostic Operating Go to “Step 6” on page 159.  
Instructions displayed.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symptom  
Action  
The diskette LED is blinking rapidly, or E1EA or The flash EPROM data is corrupted. Run the  
E1EB is displayed on the operator panel.  
recovery procedure for the flash EPROM.  
The system stops with a prompt to enter a  
password.  
Enter the password. You are not allowed to  
continue until a correct password has been  
entered. When you have entered a valid  
password, wait for one of the other conditions  
to occur.  
The system stops with an eight-digit error  
code(s) displayed on the console.  
Record the error code(s) and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
The system login prompt is displayed.  
You may not have pressed the correct key, or  
you may not have pressed the key soon  
enough when you were to indicate a Service  
Mode boot of diagnostic programs. If this was  
the case, start over at the beginning of this  
step.  
If you are sure you pressed the correct key in a  
timely manner go to Step 7.  
The system does not respond when the  
password is entered.  
Go to Step 7.  
The system stopped and an indicator is  
displayed on the system console and an  
eight-digit error code is not displayed.  
If the indicator (text or icon) represents:  
v
v
v
v
v
A keyboard, record error code M0KBD000  
and report the problem to the service  
organization.  
Memory, record error code M0MEM002 and  
report the problem to the service  
organization.  
SCSI, record error code M0CON000 and  
report the problem to the service  
organization.  
Network, record error code M0NET000 and  
report the problem to the service  
organization.  
Speaker/Audio, record error code M0BT0000  
and report the problem to the service  
organization.  
158 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Action  
The System Management Services menu is  
displayed.  
The device or media you are attempting to boot  
from might be faulty.  
1. Check the SMS error log for any errors. To  
check the error log:  
v
v
v
Select tools  
Select error log  
If an error is logged, check the time  
stamp.  
v
v
If the error was logged during the current  
boot attempt, record it and report it to  
your service person.  
If no recent error is logged in the error  
log, continue to the next step below.  
2. If you are attempting to load the Online  
Diagnostics, try loading the Stand-alone  
Diagnostics. Otherwise, record error code  
M0SCSI01 and report to your service  
representative.  
The system appears to be stopped, the disk  
Record error code M0MEM001 and report the  
activity light is on continuously, and a beep was problem to the service organization.  
heard from the system unit.  
The system stops and the message STARTING  
SOFTWARE PLEASE WAIT ... is displayed.  
Report error code M0BT0000.  
The message ″The system will now continue  
the boot process″ is displayed continuously on  
the system unit’s console.  
Report error code M0SCSI01.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
The diagnostics loaded correctly.  
Go to “Problem Determination Using the Stand-alone or Online Diagnostics” on  
page 149.  
There is a problem with the keyboard.  
Find the type of keyboard you are using in the following table. Then follow the  
instructions given in the Action column.  
Keyboard Type  
Action  
101-key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD001 and report the  
key used. The Enter key is within one  
horizontal row of keys.  
problem to the service organization.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Keyboard Type  
Action  
102-key keyboard. Identify by the type of Enter Record error code M0KBD002 and report the  
key used. The Enter key extends into two  
horizontal rows of keys.  
problem to the service organization.  
Kanji keyboard. Identify by the Japanese  
characters.  
Record error code M0KBD003 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
ASCII-terminal keyboard. This applies to all  
attached terminals.  
Go to the problem-determination documentation  
for this of type terminal.  
160 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A. Environmental Notices  
Product Recycling and Disposal  
This unit contains materials such as circuit boards and connectors with lead that require  
special handling and disposal at end of life. Before this unit is disposed, these materials  
must be removed and recycled or discarded according to applicable regulations. This  
manual contains specific information on batteries where applicable. This product may  
contain nickel-cadmium and/or lithium batteries. The battery(s) must be recycled or  
disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. In the  
United States, IBM has established a collection process for reuse, recycling, or proper  
disposal of used sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium and nickel metal hydride batteries  
and battery packs from IBM equipment. For information on proper disposal of the nickel  
cadmium batteries in this product, please contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. For  
information on battery disposal outside the United States, contact your local waste  
disposal facility.  
Environmental Design  
The environmental efforts that have gone into the design of this system signifies IBM’s  
commitment to improve the quality of its products and processes. Some of these  
accomplishments include the elimination of the use of Class I ozone-depleting  
chemicals in the manufacturing process and reductions in manufacturing wastes. For  
more information, contact an IBM account representative.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
162 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B. Notices  
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.  
The manufacturer may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this  
document in other countries. Consult the manufacturer’s representative for information  
on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to the  
manufacturer’s product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only  
that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any intellectual property right of the  
manufacturer may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate  
and verify the operation of any product, program, or service.  
The manufacturer may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject  
matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you  
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the  
manufacturer.  
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country  
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: THIS MANUAL IS  
PROVIDED ″AS IS″ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in  
certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes  
are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in  
new editions of the publication. The manufacturer may make improvements and/or  
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any  
time without notice.  
Information concerning products made by other than the manufacturer was obtained  
from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements, or other publicly  
available sources. The manufacturer has not tested those products and cannot confirm  
the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to products made  
by other than the manufacturer. Questions on the capabilities of products made by other  
than the manufacturer should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
164 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C. Checking the Current Firmware Levels  
To check the current levels that are installed on the system, do the following:  
1. Log in as root user.  
2. Enter the following command:  
lscfg -vp | grep alterable  
3. Press enter. A report will be produced similar to the following:  
ROM Level.(alterable).......sh000221  
ROM Level.(alterable).......SPH00056  
<=== service processor F/W level  
<=== system F/W level  
Notes:  
1. In the example above, if the current version of service processor firmware is  
sh000221, the last six characters of the ROM Level represent a date in a yymmdd  
format, where yy is the last two digits of the year, mm is the month and dd is the day  
of the firmware (Julian date).  
2. Also in the example above, if the current version of system firmware is SPH00056,  
the last five characters of the ROM Level represent a date in a yyddd format, where  
yy is the last two digits of the year and ddd is the Gregorian date of the firmware.  
Check the RS/6000 support web site at http://www.rs6000.ibm.com/support/micro for the  
latest level of downloadable firmware and update instructions. If the version of system  
firmware installed on your system is newer than (has a later date) or the same date as  
the system firmware shown on the web site, do not download and apply the update. If  
the version of service processor firmware installed on your system is newer than (has a  
later date) or the same date as the service processor firmware shown on the web site,  
do not download and apply the update.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
166 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY  
Terminal  
The following general attributes are the default settings for the diagnostic programs. Be  
sure your terminal is set to these attributes.  
Note: Set these attributes before the diagnostic programs are loaded.  
General Setup  
Attributes  
3151  
/11/31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161 /3164  
Settings  
Description  
Machine mode  
3151  
3151 PC  
3161 or  
3164  
The diagnostic programs are set  
to emulate use of the 3161 ASCII  
Display Terminal. If your terminal  
can emulate a 5085, 3161 or  
3164 terminal, use these attribute  
settings. Otherwise, refer to your  
operator’s manual, compare the  
attribute descriptions with those  
of your terminal, and set your  
attributes accordingly.  
Generated Code Set  
Screen  
ASCII  
Normal  
24 x 80  
Jump  
Normal  
Uses the EIA-232 interface  
protocol.  
Row and Column  
Scroll  
24 x 80  
Jump  
Uses the EIA-232 interface  
protocol.  
Jump  
Off  
When the last character on the  
bottom line is entered, the screen  
moves down one line.  
Auto LF  
Off  
Off  
For the ″On″ setting, pressing the  
Return key moves the cursor to  
the first character position of the  
next line. For the ″Off″ setting,  
pressing the Return key moves  
the cursor to the first character  
position of the current line. The  
CR and LF characters are  
generated by the New line  
setting.  
CRT saver  
Off  
Off  
10  
The ″10″ setting causes the  
display screen to go blank if there  
is no activity for 10 minutes.  
When the system unit sends data  
or a key is pressed, the screen  
contents display again.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General Setup  
Attributes  
3151  
/11/31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161 /3164  
Settings  
Description  
Line wrap  
On  
On  
On  
The cursor moves to the first  
character position of the next line  
in the page after it reaches the  
last character position of the  
current line in the page.  
Forcing insert  
Tab  
Off  
Off  
Field  
Field  
Field  
All  
The column tab stops are  
ignored, and the tab operation  
depends on the field attribute  
character positions.  
Trace  
Both inbound data (data to the  
system unit) and outbound data  
(data from the system unit) to and  
from the main port can be  
transferred to the auxiliary port  
without disturbing  
communications with the system  
unit when the Trace key is  
pressed.  
Additional Communication Attributes  
The following communication attributes are for the 3151, 3161, and 3164 terminals.  
Communication  
Setup Attributes  
3151/11  
/31/41)  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61,  
Settings  
3161 /3164  
Settings  
Description  
Operating mode  
Echo  
Echo  
Echo  
Data entered from the keyboard  
on the terminal is sent to the  
system unit for translation and  
then sent back to the display  
screen. Sometimes called  
conversational mode.  
Line speed  
9600 bps  
9600 bps  
9600 bps  
Uses the 9600 bps (bits per  
second) line speed to  
communicate with the system  
unit.  
Word length (bits)  
Parity  
8
8
8
Selects eight bits as a data word  
length (byte).  
No  
No  
No  
Does not add a parity bit and is  
used together with the word  
length attribute to form the 8-bit  
data word (byte).  
Stop bit  
1
1
1
Places a bit after a data word  
(byte).  
168 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communication  
Setup Attributes  
3151/11  
/31/41)  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61,  
Settings  
3161 /3164  
Settings  
Description  
Turnaround character CR  
CR  
CR  
Selects the carriage return (CR)  
character as the line turnaround  
character.  
Interface  
EIA-232  
EIA-232  
IPRTS  
EIA-232  
IPRTS  
Uses the EIA-232 interface  
protocol.  
Line control  
IPRTS  
500  
Uses the ’permanent request to  
send’ (IPRTS) signal to  
communicate with system unit.  
Break signal (ms)  
500  
On  
500  
The terminal sends a break signal  
to the system unit within 500 ms  
after the Break key is pressed.  
Send null suppress  
Send null  
On  
Trailing null characters are not  
sent to the system unit.  
On  
Trailing null characters are sent to  
the system unit.  
Response delay (ms) 100  
100  
100  
The terminal waits for 100 ms for  
the system unit to respond.  
Additional Keyboard Attributes  
The following keyboard attributes are for the keyboard attached to the 3151, 3161, and  
3164 terminals.  
Keyboard Setup  
Attributes  
3151/11  
/31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161 /3164  
Settings  
Description  
Enter  
Return  
New line  
CR  
Return  
New line  
CR  
Return  
New line  
CR  
The Enter key functions as the  
Return key.  
Return  
New line  
The cursor moves to the next line  
when the Return key is pressed.  
The Return key generates the  
carriage return (CR) and the line  
feed (LF) characters. The line  
turnaround occurs after the CR  
and LF characters are generated.  
Send  
Page  
Page  
Page  
The contents of the current page  
are sent to the system unit when  
the Send key is pressed.  
Insert character  
Space  
Space  
Space  
A blank character is inserted  
when the Insert key is pressed.  
Appendix D. General Attributes Required When Using a TTY Terminal 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Printer Attributes  
The following printer attributes are for a printer attached to the 3151, 3161, and 3164  
terminals.  
Printer Setup  
Attributes  
3151/11  
/31/41  
Settings  
3151  
/51/61  
Settings  
3161 /3164  
Settings  
Description  
Line speed  
9600  
9600  
9600  
Uses 19200 or 9600 bps (bits per  
second) line speed to  
communicate with the system  
unit.  
Word length (bits)  
8
8
8
Selects eight bits as a data word  
length (byte).  
Parity  
Even  
1
Even  
1
No  
1
Stop bit  
Places a bit after a data word  
(byte).  
Characters  
Line end  
Print  
ALL  
ALL  
CR-LF  
View port  
Off  
Print EOL  
Print null  
Off  
170 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix E. Modem Configurations  
The service processor is designed to place little demand on the attached modem,  
thereby increasing the setup and connection success rates.  
Sample Modem Configuration Files  
Several sample modem configurations files are supplied that either work directly with  
your modem, or provide a good starting point for a custom setup, if required. These  
files are included on the Sample Modem Configuration Files diskette and in your service  
processor firmware with the following names:  
Diskette File Name  
modem_z.cfg  
service processor Firmware File Name  
modem_z.sp  
modem_z0.cfg  
modem_f.cfg  
modem_z0.sp  
modem_f.sp  
modem_f0.cfg  
modem_f1.cfg  
modem_m0.cfg  
modem_m1.cfg  
modem_f0.sp  
modem_f1.sp  
modem_m0.sp  
modem_m1.sp  
The sample modem configuration files are located in the /usr/share/modems  
subdirectory, if your server is using AIX. A listing of each file is included at the end of  
this appendix.  
Use the following selection procedures and your modem manual, to determine which of  
the configuration files is suitable for your use.  
Configuration File Selection  
1. Is your modem an IBM 7852-400?  
If Yes, use modem configuration file modem_m0.cfg and then go to step 7.  
Note: The IBM 7852-400 modem has DIP switches on the right side of the unit.  
See “IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings” on page 174 for the correct switch  
settings.  
If No, continue with step 2.  
2. Is your modem an IBM 7857-017?  
If Yes, use modem configuration file modem_m1.cfg and then go to step 7.  
Note: The IBM 7857-017 modem has two telephone line connections on the back  
of the unit. One is marked LL (for Leased Line), and the other is marked  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PTSN (for Public Telephone Switched Network). The service processor  
expects to use the modem on the public network, so the telephone line  
should attach to the PTSN connector.  
If No, continue with step 3.  
3. Does your modem respond to the extended command set (prefixed with &)?  
If Yes, go to step 5.  
OR  
If No, continue with step 4.  
4. Does your modem respond to:  
v
ATZ reset command,  
OR  
v
ATZn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, and so on?  
If ATZ, configuration file modem_z.cfg is recommended. If ATZn, configuration  
file modem_z0.cfg is recommended.  
Go to step 7.  
5. Does your modem command set include a test for V.42 error correction at the  
remote modem (often called “Auto-Reliable Mode”)?  
If Yes, disable this test. You can use sample configuration files  
/usr/share/modem_m0.cfg  
OR  
/usr/share/modem_m1.cfg as models to help you create a file for your particular  
modem. See “Customizing the Modem Configuration Files” on page 173. Go to step  
7.  
If No, go to step 6.  
6. Does your modem respond to:  
v
AT&F reset command,  
OR  
v
AT&Fn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, and so on.?  
If AT&F, configuration file modem_f.cfg is recommended.  
If AT&Fn, configuration file modem_f0.cfg or modem_f1.cfg is recommended,  
depending on which provides the hardware flow control profile.  
7. You have completed selection of the configuration file.  
If your modem configuration selection is not available in the Service Processor  
Modem Configuration Menu, you must access it through the Configure Remote  
Maintenance Policy Service Aid.  
If you find it necessary to adjust any of these configuration files, do so with  
reference to the manual that came with your modem. It is recommended you select  
settings that enable hardware flow control and respond to DTR.  
Note: Some older modems do not respond to the commands X0 or &R1. You  
should edit out these commands from the modem configuration file if yours is  
such a modem. See your modem manual for more information.  
172 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: Some modems, such as the IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging  
function. Although they can be used for paging, they return an error message  
when they do not get the expected response from another modem. Therefore,  
even though the paging was successful, the error message causes the Service  
Processor to retry, continuing to place pager calls for the number of retries  
specified in the Call-Out Policy Setup Menu. These retries result in redundant  
pages.  
Examples for Using the Generic Sample Modem Configuration Files  
Modem  
Setup Z  
Setup Z0  
(Rare)  
Setup F  
Setup F0  
Setup F1  
AT&T DataPort 2001 **  
Bocamodem 1440E  
X
X
Hayes Smart Modem  
300  
X
IBM 5841  
IBM 5843  
IBM 7851  
IBM 7852-10  
IBM 7855  
X
X
X
X
X
X
USRobotics 36.6K  
Sportster  
Zoom V.32  
X
Note: ** Ring interrupt only on first ring.  
Customizing the Modem Configuration Files  
You can create your own modem configuration files or modify the samples provided.  
After you customize your modem configuration files, you must access them through the  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid rather than from the service  
processor menus.  
Notes:  
1. If you have already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations and  
telephone numbers from the service processor menus, use the service aid to  
specify your customized modem configuration files.  
2. If you have not already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations, and  
telephone numbers from the service processor menus, you can use the service aids  
to set them while you specify your customized modem configuration files.  
To disable Auto-Reliable Mode testing of the remote modem, use the sample modem  
configuration file /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg as a model to modify.  
1. Find the necessary command in your modem manual.  
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Copy the /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg file to a new file with a different name  
(for example modem_fx.cfg).  
3. In the new file (modem_fx.cfg), change the line Send "ATE0T\r" to Send  
"ATcccE0T\r" where ccc is the added command as specified your modem manual,  
as follows:  
Change the third line of each of the following stanzas:  
v
v
v
condout  
condin  
ripo  
4. Save the changes.  
IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings  
If you are using a 7852-400 modem to enable service processor communications, the  
DIP (dual inline package) switches must be set according to the following table.  
Switch  
Position  
Up  
Function  
1
2
Force DTR  
Up  
Flow Control &E4  
3
Down  
Down  
Up  
Result Codes Enabled  
4
Modem Emulation Disabled  
Auto Answer Enabled  
5
6
Up  
Maximum Throughput Enabled  
RTS Normal Functions  
Enable Command Mode  
Remote Digital Loopback Test Enabled  
Dial-Up Line Enabled  
7
Up  
8
Down  
Down  
Up  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
*Up  
AT Responses Enabled (Extended Responses Disabled)  
Asynchronous Operation  
28.8KB Line Speed  
*Down  
Up  
Up  
Up  
CD and DSR Normal Functions  
2-Wire Leased Line Enabled  
Up  
* Only switches 11 and 12 are changed from the factory default settings.  
Xon/Xoff Modems  
Some early modems assume software flow control (Xon/Xoff) between the computer  
and the modem. Modems with this design send extra characters during and after the  
transmitted data. The service processor cannot accept these extra characters. If your  
configuration includes such a modem, your functional results may be unpredictable.  
The sample modem configuration files included in this package do not support these  
modems, so custom configuration files are necessary. Anchor Automation 2400E is an  
example of such a modem.  
Iif you experience unexplainable performance problems that may be due to Xon/Xoff  
characters, it is recommended that you upgrade your modem..  
174 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ring Detection  
Most modems produce an interrupt request each time they detect a ring signal. Some  
modems generate an interrupt only on the first ring signal that they receive. AT&T Data  
Port 2001 is an example of such a modem.  
The service processor uses the ring interrupt request to count the number of rings when  
Ring Indicate Power-On (RIPO) is enabled. If your modem produces an interrupt on  
only the first ring, set Ring Indicate Power-On to start on the first ring. Otherwise, you  
can choose to start Ring Indicate Power-On on any ring count.  
Terminal Emulators  
The service processor is compatible with simple ASCII terminals, and therefore  
compatible with most emulators. When a remote session is handed off from the service  
processor to the operating system, agreement between terminal emulators becomes  
important.  
The server’s operating system will have some built-in terminal emulators. You may also  
have a commercially available terminal emulation. It is important that the local and host  
computers select the same or compatible terminal emulators so that the key  
assignments and responses match, ensuring successful communications and control.  
For best formatting, choose line wrap in your terminal emulator setup.  
Recovery Procedures  
Situations such as line noises and power surges can sometimes cause your modem to  
enter an undefined state. When it is being used for dial-in, dial-out or ring indicate  
power-on, your modem is initialized each time one of these actions is expected. If one  
of these environmental conditions occur after your modem has been initialized, it may  
be necessary to recover your modem to a known state.  
If your modem communicates correctly with remote users, it is probably in control. It  
may be wise to occasionally change some of the functional settings and then change  
them back, just for the sense of security that the modem is communicating, and to  
ensure it has been initialized recently.  
If your system is particularly difficult to access physically, another strategy is to protect it  
with an Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS) and a phone-line surge protector.  
In case recovery becomes necessary, shut down your system as gracefully as possible.  
Disconnect the power cable and press the power button to drain capacitance while  
power is disconnected. Disconnect and reconnect modem power, then reconnect  
system power to completely reinitialize your system.  
Transfer of a Modem Session  
Because many modem command variations exist, the sample modem configuration files  
located at the end of this appendix have been written to capture the largest number of  
workable modem settings.  
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The modem command &Dn (where ’n’ is a number) generally sets the modem  
response to the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal from the server’s serial port. The  
desired response is that the modem will hold a connection while DTR is enabled, and  
drop the connection when DTR is released. This is the mechanism by which the server  
hangs up on a connection under normal conditions.  
Consult your modem manual for its specific response scheme for the &Dn command.  
Two strategies are available for dealing with the modem’s response to DTR:  
v
v
Recovery  
Prevention  
Before you use one of these strategies, determine if your server’s modem is set up  
properly to respond to DTR.  
With the remote terminal connected to serial port 1 and defined as the Primary Console  
Device, there are two tests you can perform:  
1. Will the modem drop the connection after the System initialization complete  
message displays at the remote terminal?  
If Yes, the modem is set up correctly.  
If No, try another &Dn setting for your server’s modem. See your modem manual  
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of the  
sample modem configuration files:  
v
v
v
modem_f.cfg  
modem_f0.cfg  
modem_f1.cfg  
.
2. Will the server’s modem disconnect when the power drops? You can make this  
observation at the remote terminal by commanding your server to shutdown and  
power off. (The AIX command shutdown -F will do this.) Watch for the message NO  
CARRIER on your remote terminal.  
If Yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.  
If No, try another &Dn setting for your server’s modem. See your model manual for  
this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of the  
sample modem configuration.  
If you are using modem_z.cfg or modem_z0.cfg, you cannot control DTR response. If  
your remote terminal does not disconnect after logging off, you must command the  
remote terminal emulator to hang up. This then breaks the connection.  
Recovery Strategy  
The recovery strategy consists of making two calls to establish a remote session. This  
is the easiest solution to implement, and allows more freedom for configuring your  
server’s serial ports.  
176 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To set up a remote terminal session, dial into the service processor and start the  
system. After the operating system is loaded and initialized, the connection will be  
dropped. At this point, you call the server back and the operating system will answer  
and offer you the login prompt.  
Prevention Strategy  
The disconnect is caused by the operating system when it initializes the Primary  
Console. The modem tests listed above are conducted with the remote terminal  
selected as the primary console to manifest the modem’s response to DTR transitions.  
v
v
v
If a local ASCII terminal or a graphics console is to be a permanent part of your  
server, then make one of them the primary console. Your remote terminal will no  
longer experience the connection loss.  
If a local console is not a permanent part of your server, you can still assign either  
the unused graphics console or the unused serial port as the primary console. This  
gives you the desired seamless connection at your remote terminal.  
If you choose to use the unused serial port as the primary console, some initialization  
traffic will be sent to any serial device attached to that port. As a result, that serial  
device’s connection and function could be affected. These impacts may make that  
port unattractive for devices other than a temporary local ASCII terminal.  
Modem Configuration Samples  
Sample File modem_z.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many early Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the ATZ reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This setup will work for many modems, but it is required for early vintage  
modems which respond to neither the ATZ0 reset command nor the extended (&)  
commands. Refer to your modem manual.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
Turn off responses  
Z
Reset to factory defaults Q0  
E0 Turn echo off  
Q1  
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
#
V0 Use numeric responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
S0=2 Answer on second ring  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "ATZQ0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "ATZQ0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATE0T\r" # Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
178 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "ATZQ0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Sample File modem_z0.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z0  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for some early Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the ATZ0 reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This setup is recommended for modems that will respond to the ATZ0 command  
and which do not respond to the extended (&) commands. Refer to your modem  
manual.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
#
AT Attention Code  
Z0 Reset. Restore Profile 0 Q0  
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
Turn off responses  
Q1  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
S0=2 Answer on second ring  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "ATZ0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
180 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
timeout 60  
disconnect:  
done  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "ATZ0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "ATZ0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
responses.  
#
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Sample File modem_f.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early  
vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is recommended. If your modem responds to  
the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), setup file  
F0 or F1 is recommended.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
#
AT Attention Code  
&F Reset to default profile Q0  
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
Turn off responses  
Q1  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
S0=2 Answer on second ring  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
# &C1 Detect CD  
#
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
#
#
#
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&FQ0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
182 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&FQ0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
timeout 60  
page:  
done  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&FQ0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Sample File modem_f0.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F0  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the AT&F0 reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early  
vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is recommended. If your modem responds to  
the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), but doesn't  
work properly with this setup file, setup F1 is recommended.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
184 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
AT Attention Code  
# &F0 Reset. Restore profile 0 Q0  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
#
#
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
Q1  
Turn off responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
S0=2 Answer on second ring  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
# &C1 Detect CD  
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)  
#
#
#
#
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&F0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&F0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&F0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
186 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Sample File modem_f1.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F1  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the AT&F1 reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This set up is for modems with extended (&) commands and which do not work  
properly with setup F0. For early vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is  
recommended.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
AT Attention Code  
# &F1 Reset. Restore profile 1 Q0  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
#
#
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
Q1  
Turn off responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
S0=2 Answer on second ring  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
# &C1 Detect CD  
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)  
#
#
#
#
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P  
Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&F1Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&F1Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
188 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&F1Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Appendix E. Modem Configurations 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
disk drive activity LED 6, 8  
display/alter bootlist 126  
Numerics  
12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive  
using 30  
3.5–inch diskette drive  
using 12  
7135 RAIDiant array 142  
7318 server service aid 143  
8mm Tape Drive  
E
electrical safety xi  
electrical xi  
laser compliance statement xii  
EPROM  
updates 67  
using 23  
Ethernet  
5
Ethernet port  
4
A
about this book xv  
F
account number 58  
alter/display bootlist 126  
attributes required for TTY terminal 167  
features  
1
PCI bus  
1
fibre channel RAID service aids 131  
flash SK-NET FDDI firmware 132  
audio ports  
5
B
G
battery  
general access password, changing 46  
general user menus 43  
disposal, recycling 161  
graphical system management services 73  
C
cables  
safety xi  
H
hardware problem determination 149  
call-in security 62  
call out 66  
call-out 57  
headphone  
4
headphone jack 6, 8  
heartbeat 65  
policy 57  
CD-ROM drive  
using 14  
I
introducing tasks and service aids 113  
ISO 9000 xv  
check points 43, 51  
communication  
requirements xi  
Configure Service Processor 120  
connecting  
K
keyboard  
port  
5
keyboards  
using  
cables xi  
9
connectors  
4
console mirroring  
L
enable/disable 46  
quick disconnect 67  
system configuration 67  
customer administration center 56  
language selection 53  
laser compliance statement xii  
laser safety information xii  
local area network service aid 135  
log repair action service aid 135  
D
diagnostics  
M
online 107  
online diagnostics modes of operation 109  
operating considerations 107  
stand-alone 107  
menus  
general user 43  
privileged user 44  
standalone diagnostics 112  
TTY terminal attributes 167  
disconnecting  
service processor 42  
service processor call-in/call-out setup 54  
service processor call-out policy setup 57  
service processor customer account setup 58  
cables xi  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
menus (continued)  
problem determination  
service processor language selection 53  
service processor menus  
using the stand-alone or online diagnostics 149,  
156  
SMS 41  
when unable to load diagnostics 156  
product disposal 161  
progress indicators 43, 51  
publications, online xv  
service processor reboot policy setup 59  
service processor serial port selection 55  
service processor serial port snoop setup 47  
service processor serial port speed setup 55  
service processor setup 45  
service processor system information 50  
service processor system power control 48  
service processor telephone setup 56  
support menus  
R
read system, POST errors 43, 51  
reading the operator panel display  
8
rear connector locations  
reboot recovery 59, 63  
recycling 161  
4
service processor service aids 41  
related publications xv  
remote latency 58  
remote timeout 58  
microphone  
microphone receptacle 6, 8  
modem  
4
repair log service aid 135  
reset service processor 47  
reset switch 6, 8  
configuration file selection 171  
configurations 171  
transfer 175  
restart recovery 59, 63  
RETAIN 58  
retries 58  
ring indicator power-on 50  
run exercisers 136  
modem_f.cfg, sample file 182  
modem_f0.cfg, sample file 184  
modem_f1.cfg, sample file 187  
modem_z.cfg, sample file 177  
modem_z0.cfg, sample file 179  
mouse  
S
port  
5
safety notices xi  
safety notices xi  
SCSI  
using 10  
N
bus analyzer 138  
device identification and removal 139  
network service aid 135  
SCSI port  
security, call-in 62  
security bolt  
service aids 113, 114  
5
O
online diagnostics 107  
online publications xv  
operational phases, service processor  
standby 70  
4
7135 RAIDiant array 142  
7318 service aid 143  
operator panel display 6, 8  
add resource 114  
P
AIX shell prompt 115  
pager 57  
analyze adapter internal log 115  
backup/restore media 115  
call in/out setup 121  
parallel port  
passwords  
5
changing General-Access password 46  
changing privileged access password 46  
overview 45  
certify media 115  
change hardware VPD 116  
configure dials and LPFKeys 116  
configure ISA adapter 117  
configure reboot policy 117  
configure remote maintenance policy 118  
configure ring indicate 120  
configure surveillance policy 123  
create customized configuration diskette 123  
delete resource 123  
POST errors  
read 43  
power connector  
5
power-on LED 6, 8  
power-on methods 61  
power-on switch, location 6, 8  
preface xv  
primary console 177  
privileged access password, changing 46  
privileged user menus 44  
disk based diagnostic 141  
disk to disk copy 124  
display/alter bootlist 126  
192 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
service aids 113, 114 (continued)  
display/alter sector 125  
service processor menus (continued)  
customer account 58  
display configuration and resource list 125  
display firmware device node information 125  
display hardware error report 125  
display hardware VPD 125  
display microcode level 130  
display or change diagnostic run-time options 126  
display previous diagnostic results 127  
display resource attributes 127  
display service hints 128  
general user 43  
language selection 53  
menu inactivity 42  
privileged user 44  
reboot policy 59  
restart policy 59  
serial port selection 55  
Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu 47  
serial port speed setup 55  
setup menu 45  
display software product data 128  
display system environmental sensors 128  
display test patterns 130  
supported menu options 42  
system information 50  
system power control 48  
telephone number 56  
service processor procedures in service mode 71  
service provider 56  
download microcode 130  
fibre channel RAID service aids 131  
flash SK-NET FDDI firmware 132  
format media 132  
generic microcode download 134  
local area network 135  
log repair action 135  
machine check error log 125  
modem configuration 121  
setting up 7044 Model 170  
SSA service aids 141  
standalone diagnostics 107  
start talk mode 46  
1
starting the system unit  
7
PCI RAID physical disk identify 136  
periodic diagnostics 135  
Status light  
STBY 70  
5
process supplemental media 136  
ring indicate power on policy 120  
run diagnostics 136  
stopping the system unit  
surveillance  
7
failure 65  
run error log analysis 136  
run exercisers 136  
save or restore hardware management policies 138  
save or restore service processor configuration 138  
SCSI bus analyzer 138  
operating system 65  
set parameters 46  
system firmware 65  
system administrator 56  
system features  
1
SCSI device identification and removal 139  
SCSI tape drive 139  
spare sector availability 141  
SSA service aids 141  
system information menu 50  
system management services  
graphical system management services 73  
config 75  
udate system flash 142  
multiboot 76  
update system or service processor flash 141  
service center 56  
service director feature  
using 38  
service mode  
utilities 79  
text-based system management services 94  
display configuration 94  
select language 104  
utilities 98  
system phone number 57  
system POST errors  
read 43  
system power-on methods 61  
system unit  
service processor procedures 71  
service processor 42  
operational phases 69  
service processor call-in security 62  
service processor feature  
using 38  
service processor menu inactivity 42  
service processor menus  
starting  
7
stopping  
7
system verification procedure 145  
T
accessing locally 42  
accessing remotely 42  
tablet  
5
call-in/call-out 54  
call-out policy 57  
telephone line requirements for the United Kingdom xi  
text-based system management services 94  
Index 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
trademarks xv  
transfer of a modem session 175  
TTY terminal attributes required for diagnostics  
general 167  
U
unattended start mode, enable/disable 48  
United Kingdom’s telephone line requirements xi  
update system flash 142  
using  
system verification procedure 145  
using service director feature 38  
using service processor feature 38  
using the 12/24GB 4mm Tape Drive 30  
using the 3.5-inch diskette drive 12  
using the 8mm Tape Drive 23  
using the CD-ROM drive 14  
using the keyboards  
using the mouse 10  
9
using the service processor  
service processor menus  
SMS 41  
support menus  
service processor service aids 41  
V
voice phone number 57  
194 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reader’s Comments — We’d Like to Hear From You  
Title:RS/6000 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Order Number: SA38-0559-01  
Overall how satisfied are you with the information in this book?  
Very  
Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied  
Very  
Satisfied  
h
Dissatisfied  
h
Overall Satisfaction  
h
h
h
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:  
Very  
Satisfied Neutral Dissatisfied  
Very  
Satisfied  
Dissatisfied  
Accurate  
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Complete  
Easy to find  
Easy to understand  
Well organized  
Applicable to your tasks  
Please tell us how we can improve this book:  
Thank you for your response. May we contact you? h Yes h No  
When you send comments to us, you grant us a nonexclusive right to use or  
distribute your comments in any way we believe appropriate without incurring  
any obligation to you.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not Staple  
Fold and Tape  
NO POSTAGE  
NECESSARY  
IF MAILED IN THE  
UNITED STATES  
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE  
Information Development  
Department H6DS-9561  
11400 Burnet Road  
Austin, TX 78758-3493  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not Staple  
Fold and Tape  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
196 44P Series Model 170 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBMR  
Printed in the United States of America  
on recycled paper containing 10%  
recovered post-consumer fiber.  
October 2000  
SA38-0559-01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Car Seat PD254443A User Manual
Grizzly Work Light H7517 User Manual
Hamilton Beach Iron 19900 User Manual
Harrington Hoists Motorcycle MR2 Series User Manual
Hearth and Home Technologies Stove CB1200I B User Manual
Hotpoint Washer Dryer AQD1170F User Manual
Hotpoint Washer VWSR4100 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Time Clock 6212B User Manual
Husqvarna Vacuum Cleaner DC5500 User Manual
Hypercom Network Card IEN 100 User Manual